JP6744953B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Generally, in a game machine, for example, a ball game machine, a winning lottery is executed when a game ball enters the starting opening, and when the lottery is won, a winning game advantageous to the player, etc. To generate the profit status of. In many pachinko halls, illegal nail adjustment has been conventionally performed for this type of gaming machine, which has fueled the player's aspirations. On the other hand, the manufacturer has been developing a game machine with a nail adjustment prevention measure (see, for example, Patent Document 1), but it is hard to say that sufficient results have been achieved, and in recent years, in fact, There is a tendency to completely prohibit the unacceptable nail adjustments. Therefore, it is necessary to inspect whether the pay-out performance of the gaming machine is out of the original performance due to nail adjustment or the like.

JP, 2017-144042, A

Therefore, it is necessary to provide a game machine with a performance display device that displays information (for example, a base value or the like) about performance based on the game record so that the payout performance and the like can be easily grasped. However, since the program capacity of the gaming machine and the control relating to the gaming are legally strictly limited, when the above performance display device is provided, the gaming process including the operation check does not become complicated, and the gaming machine It is important to reduce the control burden.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the control load of the gaming machine when the above performance display device is provided.

The above object of the present invention can be achieved by the following means. In addition, although the corresponding elements in the embodiments are shown in parentheses, the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) A first RAM area (in-area RAM) capable of storing game data used in the game processing relating to the game progress, and a first RAM area capable of storing information display data used in the information display processing not directly related to the game progress A RAM (RAM 203) including two RAM areas (outside area RAM);
A first ROM area (area ROM) for storing a game control program for executing the game processing, and a second ROM area (outside area ROM) for storing an information display control program for executing the information display processing ROM (ROM202) including
A CPU that executes a game control operation based on the game control program and the information display control program, and a game control means (main controller 20),
Information display means (performance display device 99) capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game record,
A gaming machine capable of executing and controlling a plurality of types of game states (normal state, latent probability state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.),
The game control means,
Based on the game control program, a game state control means (S416 in FIGS. 4 and 18) capable of controlling any of the plurality of types of game states,
An information display control unit (S040 in FIG. 8, FIG. 28, etc.) for performing control related to the information display unit based on the information display control program,
In the first RAM area, as the game data, a game information storage area capable of storing game state data (game state number YJ) for specifying the current game state is provided,
The second RAM area is provided with a specific information storage area capable of storing specific data indicating a specific game state (S829 of FIG. 28),
The information display control means,
Determination means for determining whether or not the current game state is a specific game state based on the game state data stored in the game information storage area (S828 in FIG. 28),
When the determination means determines that the specific game state, the specific information storage means (S829 of FIG. 28) for storing the specific data in the specific information storage area,
Calculating means (S040 in FIG. 8B, S830 in FIG. 28) for calculating the specific information (base value) related to the game result based on the specific data;
Display control means (S825 and S831 in FIG. 28) for controlling display of information displayed on the information display means based on the specific information calculated by the calculation means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the performance display device.

It is a front view showing the appearance of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a game board of the gaming machine and a configuration of effect buttons. It is a block diagram showing a control device of the game machine. It is a diagram for explaining the game state transition of the same gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a screen display of a liquid crystal display device according to the same gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the game state related to the same gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop relationship of the special symbols 1 and 2 in the simultaneous variation type related to the gaming machine and the front-back relationship of the display effect of the special symbol. It is a flowchart showing a first half of a main control side main processing according to the same gaming machine. It is the flowchart which shows the latter half of the main control side main processing which relates to the same game machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the input information of a setting key switch, RAM clear switch, and door opening switch and the value of a W register which concern on the same game machine, and the correspondence of input information and transfer processing. It is a flowchart which shows the operation confirmation timer setting process in FIG. 8B. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process in FIG. 8A. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st power supply abnormality check process (A) in FIG. 8A, and the 2nd power supply abnormality check process (B) in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process in FIG. 8A. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process in FIG. 8B. It is the flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption processing which relates to the same game machine. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer management process in FIG. 13. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process 1 in FIG. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol management process 2 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the starting opening check process in FIG. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state information transmission process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit determination process in FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern creation process in FIG. 18. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change in Drawing 15. It is the flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 fluctuation process in Figure 23. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the special symbol 2 change in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the first half of processing during special symbol confirmation time in Drawing 15. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a setting abnormality check process in FIGS. 17 and 18. 14 is a flowchart showing a performance display monitor process in FIG. 13. It is a flowchart which shows the test-firing test signal terminal management process in FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an out-of-area RAM clear check process in FIG. 28. It is a flowchart which shows the operation confirmation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display data update process in FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effects during the normal state and during the big hit game related to the same gaming machine. FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram which is used for describing an effect during a big hit game related to the same gaming machine. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram which is used for explaining effects at the time of ending the big hit game and during the small hit game of the same gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect during the latent probability state and the big hit game related to the same gaming machine. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram which is used to explain effects at the time of ending the big hit game and in the normal state of the same gaming machine. FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram which is used for describing an effect during a big hit game related to the same gaming machine. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram which is used for describing an effect in the normal state of the same gaming machine. It is a time chart of an outer end output signal according to the same gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern distribution table selection table according to the same gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a big hit variation pattern distribution table according to the same gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the loss variation pattern distribution table for special maps 1 concerning the same gaming machine. It is the figure which shows the loss/small hitting fluctuation pattern distribution table for special figure 2 which relates to the same game machine. It is a diagram showing an identification display unit LED data table (a) and a decimal value LED data table (b) according to the same gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display state of the performance indicator during various game periods of the same gaming machine.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiments described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of configuration: FIG. 1 and FIG. 2>
An outline of the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a front view of a gaming board.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as “gaming machine 1”) is a game board mounted on the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 such that a frame-shaped front frame 2 is openably and closably mounted, and mounted on the back surface of the front frame 2. The game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is made to face the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling game operations are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated to one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 is set. By operating to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, there is arranged a front operation panel 7 which is pivotably supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown). An upper saucer unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and an upper saucer 9 for storing the discharged game balls is formed on the upper saucer unit 8.

Further, in the upper tray unit 8, a ball pull-out button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 to the lower side of the gaming machine 1, and the payout of the game balls to a game ball lending device (not shown). A ball lending button 11 for requesting and a card return button 12 for requesting return of the valuable medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

Further, the upper tray unit 8 is provided with an effect button 13 (first operation means) and a direction key 75 (second operation means) which are configured to be operable by a player. The former production button 13 is mainly operable during a predetermined input reception period (production button monitoring period) by being operated (input acceptance is possible), and when the internal lamp (button LED 13b) is lit (input). When a predetermined operation (press, continuous hit, long press, etc.) is performed during the reception period, it is possible to bring about a change in a specific effect. The latter directional key 75 is in the shape of a cross key as shown in FIG. 2, and is provided with an up button 75a, a right button 75b, a down button 75c, and a left button 75d as up, down, left, and right directional buttons. By operating these direction instruction buttons, it is possible to display a setting screen relating to the game and change and set the volume setting, the light amount setting, the effect mode setting and the like.

A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7.

Speakers 46 that produce a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper portion of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. Further, a plurality of decoration lamps 45 (full-color LEDs: LEDs for light production) that exhibit a light production effect by decoration of light are provided at appropriate places on the glass door 6. A plurality of full-color LEDs (LEDs for light effect) as the decoration lamps 45 are provided in the peripheral direction of the pachinko gaming machine, that is, in the peripheral edge of the front frame of the glass door 6, in the circumferential direction, and are referred to as "surrounding LEDs 45" in this specification. Is called.

(Game board: Figure 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 that guides a game ball that has been launched is annularly attached to the game board 3 as a board surface partitioning member, and a substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display device (LCD) 36 is provided at a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. This liquid crystal display device 36, under the control of the effect control unit 24 to be described later, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol variable display areas), a plurality of independent numbers, characters, and symbols are used. Various decorative patterns (eg, left pattern (corresponding to the left display area), middle pattern (corresponding to the middle display area), right pattern (corresponding to the right display area)) The effect is displayed as an image.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center ornament 48 (flow path distributing means) is provided in a form of surrounding the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winding manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, is provided along the front surface side of the game board 3, and is fixed to the game board 3 with a front mounting plate 48a and the center decoration 48. And an armor frame portion 48b which forms the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 36 and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, a play area through which the game balls can pass is formed, and the game balls are also guided to the right side of the center ornament 48. The game ball hit by the launching device 32 on the upper side of the game area 3a is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b according to the strength of the launch of the game ball or the stroke length, and the left side of the center ornament 48 is displayed. Either the left downflow path 3b or the right downflow path 3c is run down.

In addition, the non-gaming area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 has various function display parts, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is used for the middle starting port 34 and the right starting port 33 (first special symbol). ), and a special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second) which are arranged side by side in correspondence with the lower right starting opening 35 (for the second special symbol). Special symbol display means) and. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variable display game is performed by a variable display operation of "special symbol". And in the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device 36, in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the decorative symbol by the image is variably displayed, together with various notice effects (effect image). The decorative symbol variable display games are designed to be executed (details of these symbol variable display games will be described later).

Further, in the various function display portions, a composite display device (LED display device for reserved composite display) 38c including a 7-segment display device (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The term "composite" refers to the special symbols 1 and 2, the display of the number of operation-retaining balls of ordinary symbols, the variable time reduction function in operation (time saving) and the high probability state notification (high accuracy medium), and five states. This is because it is a hold/time saving/high accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “composite display device”) having a display function.

Further, in the various function display portions, a normal symbol display device 39a (ordinary symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged is provided next to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, the normal symbol variable display game is executed by the variable display operation of the normal symbol expressed by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol by the LED is alternately turned on and off in a seesaw manner, and by stopping in a state in which either side is lit, it becomes possible to determine whether the normal symbol variable display game is right or wrong. There is. Further, a right-handed display device 39b with one LED is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. This right-handed display device 39b is advantageous in that "right-handed" is aimed in such a way that the game ball passes through the right-flowing route 3c by a combination of lighting and extinguishing states of the LEDs. Notify if "left-handed" aiming to pass through is advantageous. If the LED is on, it is informed that it is advantageous to hit the right side.

Below the center ornament 48, a middle starting opening 34 (first special symbol starting opening: first starting means) is provided, and inside thereof, a detection sensor 34a (medium starting opening) for detecting passage of a game ball. Sensor 34a: see FIG. 3). Below the middle start opening 34, a plurality of general winning openings 43 are provided in the lower left part of the game board surface (in the present embodiment, three on the left side), and each has a game ball inside. A general winning opening sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of is formed.

The starting port 34 is the first special symbol starting port, the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device) (hereinafter, referred to as "special symbol 1") It is a winning opening for the special symbol 1 relating to the starting condition of the variable display operation (abbreviated as FIG. 1), and does not have a starting opening opening/closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening) It is configured as a winning device. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the leftward flow path to the middle starting port 34. While the game ball that has flowed down 3b has a configuration that allows easy entry (winning), the game ball that has flowed down the rightward flow path 3c has a configuration that is difficult or impossible to enter. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, similarly to the middle starting port 34, a right starting port 33 for the special symbol 1 described later is provided as a winning port related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the special symbol 1.

Further, a combination gate 57 (specific passage area), which is a passage gate through which game balls can pass, is provided above the middle portion of the rightward flow path 3c. This winning combination gate 57 is a passing area for executing a round game when a big hit occurs, and inside thereof, a winning combination gate sensor 57a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is formed. ..

Below the winning combination gate 57, like the winning combination gate 57, a normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) including a passage gate is provided. This normal symbol starting port 37 is a winning port related to the variable display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside it, a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball. Are formed.

Below the normal symbol starting port 37, the upper special fluctuation winning device 42 for the big hit (first special electric accessory: first big winning means), the normal fluctuation winning device 41 functioning as a so-called electric tulip, the small hit Lower special variation winning device 52 for use (second special electric accessory: second big winning means), the lower right starting opening 35 for the special symbol 2 described below, so that they are located sequentially downward in this order. It is provided. These five persons are arranged in a zigzag shape as a whole, the normal symbol starting port 37 is located on the right side of the game board most, then the normal variable winning device 41, the upper special variable winning device 42, the lower right starting port 35, The lower special variation winning device 52 is displaced inward in order.

The normal variation winning device 41 is configured as a winning percentage varying type winning device in which the winning percentage of the game ball at the starting opening can be varied by the opening opening/closing means. In the case of this embodiment, there is a right starting opening 33 (first special symbol starting opening: second starting means) having a horizontally long opening for two or more game balls, and a lid for covering the right starting opening 33. It is provided with a movable piece 47 that can be projected and retracted from the game board surface, and when the movable piece 47 is in the forward state in which it projects from the game board surface, the right starting port 33 is closed (closed state), and the game board surface is in the retracted state. At this time, the right starting port 33 is opened (open state). When the normal variation winning device 41 is in the non-operating state (normal state), the movable piece 47 is in the protruding state and the right starting port 33 is closed (difficulty in winning or impossible winning state), but the normal variation winning device is When 41 is in the operating state, the movable piece 47 is in the retracted state and moves away from the right starting opening 33, and the right starting opening 33 is opened (the winning prize state). As a result, a horizontally long opening of the right starting opening 33 appears, and the game balls are picked up a lot. Inside the right starting opening 33, a detection sensor 33a (right starting opening sensor 33a: see FIG. 3) for detecting passage of a game ball is provided, and the picked up game ball is detected by this.

The right starting opening 33 provided in the normal variation winning device 41, like the middle starting opening 34, is a winning relating to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the special symbol 1 in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). In the present embodiment, when the movable piece 47 is inactive, the closed state (unwinable state) in which winning at the right starting port 33 is impossible is held.

The above-described operation of the normal variation winning device 41 has the same function as that of a so-called "electric tulip-type winning device (abbreviated as Den Chu)" in which a pair of left and right movable wings (movable members) are provided on the starting opening. .. Therefore, in the present specification, the normal variable winning device 41 is also abbreviated as “den Chu” in some cases. The configuration of the normal variable winning device 41 is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, a fixed winning rate type winning device such as the middle starting port 34 (first starting port), and a winning rate varying type winning device (second starting port) whose winning area is expanded or opened by the starting port opening/closing means. It may be configured as a general electric tulip type winning device in which the above and below are provided. In this case, the first right starting opening may be configured as the special opening 2 (or the special opening 1) and the second right starting opening may be configured as the winning opening according to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the special opening 1 (or the special opening 2). Alternatively, both of them may be configured as winning a prize holes related to the start condition of the variable display operation of the special figure 2 (or the special figure 1). In addition, a movable piece having a width of one game ball may be projected and retracted from the game board, and the movable piece may pick up the game ball and guide it to a guide gutter on the back surface of the game board.

Further, the lower right start opening 35 on the downstream side of the normal variation winning device 41, the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device) (hereinafter, referred to as "special symbol 2", depending on the case, It is a winning opening for the special symbol 2 relating to the starting condition of the variable display operation of "(special figure 2)", and in the present embodiment, the same "winning ratio fixed winning award as the middle starting opening 34, not the electric chew. Device”.

In the right downflow route 3c, an upper special variable winning device 42 for a big hit is provided in the middle of the downflow route from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 (Den Chu). The upper special variation winning device 42 includes an upper special winning opening 40 and a retractable opening door 42b that covers the upper special winning opening 40. The upper special winning opening 40 can be opened and closed by the opening and closing of the opening door 42b on the game board surface. The upper special winning opening 40 is formed with an upper special winning opening sensor 42a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entered. The open door 42b of the upper special variation winning device 42 for this big hit has the upper surface inclined to the right downward, and the game ball riding on the opening door 42b is guided down to the side of the normal variation winning device 41 (Den Chu). It is like this.

Above this upper special variation winning device 42, a horizontally elongated flow path correcting plate 37d that is inclined to the left is provided in the form of crossing the region of the rightward flow path 3c between the normal symbol starting port 37 and the normal symbol starting port 37. There is. This flow path correcting plate 37d functions to receive the game ball flowing down the rightward flow path 3c and bring the game ball toward the upper special variation winning device 42 (leftward in FIG. 2). The lower left end of the flow path correction plate 37d is above the upper special variation winning device 42. Therefore, all the game balls are picked up by the flow path correcting plate 37d and guided to the upper special variation winning device 42.

Further, below the upper special variation winning device 42, a horizontally long downflow guide plate 40d that is inclined to the left is provided between the upper special variation winning device 42 and the normal variation winning device 41. This downflow guide plate 40d has its upper right end located near the lower end of the open door 42b of the upper special variation winning device 42, and about the game ball that has flowed down from the open door 42b and whose direction has been changed by the guide nail immediately below. , A part of it is picked up and made to flow down onto the lower special variation winning device 52.

The lower special variation winning device 52 for small hits is configured to open or expand the lower large winning opening 50 by a lower large winning opening 50 and a collapsible opening door 52b that covers the lower large winning opening 50. , A lower special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening 50 is formed therein.

The process of entering the upper special winning opening 40 during a big hit is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 flows down the right flow path 3c. All the game balls are picked up by the flow path correcting plate 37d and guided to the upper special variation winning device 42. In the case of a big hit, the upper special winning opening 40 is open. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, almost all the game balls win the upper special winning opening 40 from the flow path correcting plate 37d.

In addition, the process of entering the lower major winning opening 50 at the time of a small hit is as follows. The game ball flows down the rightward flow path 3c. The game ball is guided in the direction of the upper special variation winning device 42 by the flow path correcting plate 51d. The game ball rolls on the open door 42b that closes the upper special winning opening 40 and flows down from the lower right end. Most of these game balls are guided in the direction of the normal variation winning device 41 by a game nail of a predetermined arrangement (not shown), and a part of them is guided to the lower special winning opening 50 side by riding on the downflow guide plate 40d. The opening time of the right starting opening 33 by the movable piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 is 3.7 seconds (three times of 1.2 seconds + two times of 0.5 seconds) in the probability changing state and the time saving state. In the normal state and the latent state, it is as short as 0.1 seconds. Therefore, more game balls are guided to the lower special winning opening 50 side without being picked up during the opening period of the right starting opening 33.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning openings provided in the game area 3a, if there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol starting opening 37, it is promised for each winning opening. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, 4 for the middle starting port 34, 1 for the right starting port 33, 2 for the lower right starting port 35, and the upper special winning port 40 (big winning port for big hits) 15 pieces, lower big winning opening 50 (small winning big winning opening) 10, general winning opening 43 6, ordinary symbol starting opening 37 0 (no prize ball)) game ball payout device 19 (figure) 3)). The game balls that have not won any of the above winning openings are discharged from the game area 3a through the out opening 49. Here, the "winning prize" does not have a structure in which the winning hole takes in the game ball or the winning hole takes in the game ball inside, but the winning hole formed of a passage-type gate (for example, a normal symbol starting port 37 ), it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each prize detection switch formed for each prize hole, "win" is given to the prize hole. Is treated as having occurred. The game ball related to this winning is also called a "winning ball". It should be noted that if a game ball enters the winning opening, the game ball will be detected by the prize detection switch. Therefore, in the present specification, unless otherwise specified, the game ball is detected by the prize detection switch. Regardless of whether or not a game ball enters the winning opening, it may be referred to as a "winning prize".

Further, in the area of the game board, a plurality of movable body accessories are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the flow of the game balls. In this example, the first movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory) 80 is arranged at the upper right side in the center decoration 48, that is, at a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball passing through the right downflow path 3c, and the diagonally lower right thereof. The second movable body accessory (flower-shaped accessory) 90 is disposed on the side. In these, the movable body accessory functions as a production means, and realizes the production of a movable body such as suggesting the expectation of winning the winning by the operation mode.

<2. Controller: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device for controlling game operation control of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter, referred to as “main control unit 20”) that generally controls the game operation (game operation control). A production control board (production control unit) 24 (hereinafter, referred to as "production control unit 24") that receives production control commands from the main control unit 20 and totally controls execution control (appearance control) of production by the production unit. And a payout control board (payout control means) 29 for controlling payout of prize balls, and an external power supply (not shown) to generate and supply necessary power (including backup power) to each board of the gaming machine. And a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)). A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and a ROM 202 (main control) that stores various data necessary for game operation control, in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure. A ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory are mounted to configure a microcomputer (corresponding to Z80 system) as a whole.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 gives an interrupt signal to the C80 and the CPU that give the Z80 system a periodic interrupt, a fixed-cycle pulse output creation function (bit rate generator), and a time measurement function. An interrupt controller circuit that performs interrupt enable/disable functions such as timer interrupts, a reset circuit that can reset the CPU by outputting a system reset signal by detecting power-on/power-off, power failure, etc. Watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the abnormal operation of the device, running outside the designated area (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is correctly executed within the preset address range, hardware fixed range It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers. Note that at least the main control unit (payout control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive the voltage drop signal received from the power supply board to start the necessary backup process before the power is cut off, and before the power is cut off. The game operation can be restarted after the power is turned on (backup function). In this gaming machine 1, the stored contents of each RAM can be held for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples the random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and works as a 16-bit counter as a whole. The CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state to obtain the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number is used for the big hit lottery. The internal lottery random number is obtained by adding a hard random number value and a soft random number value generated by an appropriate software process in order to prevent a hitting action such as aiming and hitting.

The main control unit 20 includes a middle starting opening sensor 34a for detecting a winning in the middle starting opening 34, a right starting opening sensor 33a for detecting a winning in the right starting opening 33, and a winning for the lower right starting opening 35. A lower right starting opening sensor 35a for detecting, a normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a for detecting passage of a game ball to the normal symbol starting opening 37, and an upper large winning opening sensor 42a for detecting a winning of the upper big winning opening 40, It is discharged from the gaming machine through a lower major winning hole sensor 52a that detects a winning of the lower major winning opening 50, a general winning hole sensor 43a that detects a winning of the general winning opening 43, an outlet 49 and each winning opening. An OUT monitor switch 49a for detecting a game ball (so-called out ball) is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. Based on the detection signal from each sensor, the main control unit 20 grasps which winning opening the game ball has won (ball).

Further, in the main control unit 20, a winning combination gate sensor 57a for detecting passage of a game ball to the winning combination gate 52, a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 203, and a pachinko game (not shown). A fraud detection sensor (vibration sensor, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, etc.) for detecting fraudulent activity on the machine 1 is connected, and the main controller 20 can receive detection signals from these. The fraud detection sensor is installed at a position suitable for detecting fraud.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening/closing of the movable piece 47 of the right starting port 33, and an upper prize hole solenoid for controlling the opening/closing of the opening door 42b of the upper prize hole 40. 42c and the lower special winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the opening door 52b of the lower special winning opening 50 are connected, and the main controller 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling them.

In addition, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main controller 20, and the main controller 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the special symbols 1 and 2. .. Further, the main control unit 20, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected, it is possible to transmit a control signal for display control of the normal symbol.

Further, a composite display device 38c and a round number display device (not shown) are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of various information displayed thereon. Has become. Further, a right-handed display device 39b is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is advantageous in that the "right-handed" aiming so that the game ball passes through the right downflow route 3c is advantageous. It is possible to transmit a control signal for informing whether or not "left hitting", which aims at passing through the leftward flow path 3b, is advantageous.

Further, a frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 uses the frame external terminal board 21 to provide predetermined game information (for example, winning game start information, start winning information). (Special symbol variation start information), prize ball number information, specific error information (vibration sensor error, radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, etc.), etc. can be output to the outside of the game machine signal (outer end signal) Has become. The frame external terminal board 21 is configured to be connectable to a data counter DT or a hall computer HC provided outside the gaming machine, and a signal (outer end signal) output from the frame external terminal board 21 is The data is sent to the data counter DT and the hall computer HC.

The frame external terminal board 21 is provided with a plurality of channels for external output. The connector corresponding to each channel and the connector on the data counter DT side are connected by a cable. Then, one signal is output from each connector (information terminal) to the outside. The outer end signals output to the outside of the gaming machine through the information terminals of the frame external terminal board 21 include, for example, the following signals (1) to (10).

(1) "Special symbol determination signal (information terminal 1)" output when the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is stopped,
(2) "Special short time big hit mid signal (information terminal 2)", which is output when the big hit game during the operation of the special symbol time shortening function described later,
(3) "Variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" that is output when the special symbol time saving function is operating,
(4) "Starting port signal (information terminal 4)" output when the starting port sensors 33a, 34a, 35a detect passage of a game ball,
(5) "Big hit signal (information terminal 5)" output during operation of the accessory continuous operation device described later,
(6) "Special symbol 1 confirmation signal (information terminal 6)" output when the variable display of special symbol 1 is stopped,
(7) "Special symbol 1 starting mouth signal (information terminal 7)" output when the right starting mouth sensor 33a or the middle starting mouth sensor 34a detects a game ball,
(8) "Special symbol 2 starting opening signal (information terminal 8)" output when the lower right starting opening sensor 35a detects a game ball,
(9) When there is a prize in the winning opening, the number of prize balls is added, and every time the total value becomes 10 or more, 10 is subtracted from the total value and the “main prize ball signal (information terminal 9 is output. )",
(10) When the RAM is cleared (output for 30000 ms after the RAM is cleared), when the setting change process described below is executed (see FIG. 11), when the magnetic sensor detects incorrect magnetism (output for 30000 ms after releasing magnetic detection), and by the radio wave sensor "Security signal (information terminal 10) is output when an illegal radio wave is detected (output for 30000 ms after being released from radio wave detection), when an illegal prize is detected for the normal start winning opening sensor 37a (output for 30000 ms after being released from 200 ms continuous ON detection). )” and other various signals can be output.

Note that the main control unit 20 outputs the corresponding outer end signal from the information terminals 1 to 10 for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) at the timing when the output of each signal arrives, but the output signal is predetermined so as not to be continuous. Output after a lapse of time (for example, 100 ms).

The hall computer HC monitors and collects the game information of the gaming machine based on the outer end signal output from the frame external terminal board 21, and comprehensively manages the operating status of the gaming machine installed in the pachinko hall. To do.

Here, the data counter DT related to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 31A(3). The data counter DT is a game information notification device that notifies specific game information regarding the connected game machine, and is usually installed on the upper part of the game machine. The data counter DT is provided with a notifying means for notifying predetermined game information based on the outer end signal from the frame external terminal board 21. The notification means is, for example, a light emitting section DTa having a built-in full-color LED, display sections DTb, DTc, DTd, DTe, etc., which are display devices such as a liquid crystal display device.

The illustrated data counter DT has the following notification function.
(A) "big hit notification function (light emitting unit DTa)" for notifying that big hit has occurred,
(B) "Big hit cumulative number notification function (big hit number display section DTd)" for notifying the total number of big hits (the number of big hits since opening)
(C) "Acquired ball number notification function (not shown)" for notifying the number of acquired balls during a big hit,
(D) A "start count notification function (start count display section DTb)" for notifying the number of times of symbol variation display game execution (the number of variations of special symbols) after the opening of a store or after the end of a big jackpot (may be a specific jackpot) ",
(E) "Start cumulative number notification function (total rotation speed display section DTc)" for notifying the total number of fluctuations of special symbols since the opening of the store,
(F) "History information notifying function (not shown)" for notifying history information such as big hit number information (may be a specific big hit number) or the number of big hits such as the day before and the day before last
(G) A "number of consecutive villas notification function (number of consecutive villas display unit DTe)" for notifying the number of consecutive villas (the number of consecutive villas that does not include the first hit) due to the big hit this time.
Reference numeral DTg is a call button for calling a hall clerk. When the call button DTg is pressed, the light emitting unit DTa emits light in a light emitting mode dedicated to calling. Further, reference numeral DTh is a push button for history information switching for displaying the history information.

The above-mentioned data counter DT is currently installed in each pachinko hall for each game table. When such a data counter DT receives, for example, one of the above-mentioned "big hit signal" and "big hit mid-big hit signal" output during a big hit, it notifies that a big hit has occurred or gives a big hit. Update the number of times. As a result, not only the player is notified of the big hit occurrence, but also the surrounding players and the hall clerk are informed that the game table is the big hit occurrence, so that the big hit occurrence can be easily identified. ..

The data counter DT generally displays necessary information on various display units according to the outer end signal type based on the switching (ON edge) from non-reception to reception of the outer end signal.

Further, the main control unit 20 corresponds to the type test (test relating to the verification regarding the type of the gaming machine based on the rules regarding the certification of the gaming machine and the verification of the type) carried out by the Japan Safety Electronics and Communication Technology Association (Bodo Association). Thus, a model test signal for specifying the game operation in real time can be output from the frame external terminal board 21. In addition, when installing a gaming machine that conforms to the type test in a pachinko hall, no modification of the matching control program is allowed. For this reason, the model test signal is repeatedly output even after installation in the pachinko hall (test firing test signal terminal management process during performance display monitor process described later (step S823 in FIG. 28, see FIG. 29 showing the details). ).

Further, a payout control board (payout control section) 29 is connected to the main control section 20, and when payout of prize balls is required, a control command (payout number of prize balls) relating to payout is issued to the payout control board 29. It is possible to send a designated payout control command).

The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (shooting control section) 28 for controlling the launching device 32 and a game ball payout apparatus (game ball payout means) 19 for paying out game balls. The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, send a status signal to the main control unit 20, etc. Is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with an out-of-supply detection sensor 19a for detecting an insufficient supply of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out. Each detection signal of can be received. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism section (not shown) for paying out the game balls, and the payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. The control signal can be transmitted.

Further, on the payout control board 29, a full detection sensor 60 that detects the full state of the upper receiving tray 9 with the game balls (in the present embodiment, a detection sensor that detects the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper receiving tray 9), A door opening sensor 61 (in the present embodiment, a detection sensor that detects an open state of the front frame 2 and/or the front operation panel 7) is connected.

The payout control board 29 can transmit various status signals to the main control unit 20 based on the detection signals from the full detection sensor 60, the door opening sensor 61, the replenishment detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. Has become. This state signal includes a ball clogging signal indicating a full state, a door opening signal indicating that the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are open, and a supply shortage indicating a lack of supply of game balls from the game ball payout device 19. A signal, a counting error signal indicating that the prize ball is insufficiently paid out or an abnormality has occurred in the ball counting sensor 19b, a payout completion signal indicating that the payout operation has been completed, etc., and various status signals can be transmitted. ing. Based on these status signals, the main controller 20 opens the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 (door open error), determines whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (supply end error), and so on. , Monitoring the full state of the upper tray 9 (ball clogging error) and the like.

Further, a launch control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a launch permission signal ES (a launch control signal) for permitting launch to the launch control board 28 can be transmitted. The firing control board 28 controls energization to a firing solenoid (not shown) provided in the firing device 32 based on the fact that the firing permission signal ES is output from the payout control board 29, and the firing operation handle 15 is provided. The operation of launching a game ball is realized. Specifically, it is detected that the launch permission signal ES is output from the payout control board 29 and that the player touches the handle by a touch sensor (not shown) provided in the launch operation handle 15. If the shooting stop switch (not shown) provided on the shooting operation handle 15 is not operated, the shooting operation of the game ball is allowed. Therefore, when the firing permission signal ES is not output, the firing operation is not executed even if the firing operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not fired. Further, the strength of launching the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the firing operation handle 15. When the payout control board 29 detects the ball clogging error, it transmits a ball clogging signal to the main control unit 20 and stops outputting the firing permission signal ES to the firing control board 28 to eliminate the full state of the upper tray 9. The control is performed so that the launching operation is stopped until such time.

Further, a setting key switch 94, a setting change switch 95, and a setting change completion switch 96 are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. Further, a setting display 97 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the setting display unit 97.

The setting key switch 94 is a "setting change operation permissible state (when ON operation)" in which a setting key possessed by a hall-related person is inserted when the power is turned on and the ON/OFF operation is performed. It is a key switch for switching to. The setting change switch 95 is a push button switch for changing the set value. The setting change completion switch 96 is a setting confirmation switch used when confirming the changed setting value. These switches are provided at appropriate places inside the game machine.

The setting display 97 displays information about the set value and functions as setting display means. In the case of this embodiment, it is composed of one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting indicator 97 is not limited to the main control board, but the payout control board 28, the firing control board 29, the relay board (relay board for relaying connections between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: not shown). No.), or a performance control unit (production control board (including a liquid crystal control board)) 24, etc., can be provided in an appropriate place inside the gaming machine.

The above-mentioned "set value" causes a change in the payout rate (so-called machine allocation (PAYOUT rate)) in a stepwise manner, and in the present embodiment, set values of 6 stages of settings 1 to 6 are provided. ing. This "setting value" defines at least a lottery probability (winning probability) of a big hit (a hit type in which a condition device described later operates) in stages (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6), The higher the set value is, the higher the winning probability is set, which is advantageous to the player. For example, setting 1 is 1/410, setting value 2 is 1/390, setting 3 is 1/370, setting 4 is 1/350, setting 5 is 1/330, and setting 6 is 1/320. In other words, the higher the set value, the higher the machine cost, which is advantageous to the player. As described above, the set value is a value that defines the machine ratio and the like, and means a value of a class related to the easiness of occurrence of a specific event (for example, a big hit).

By the way, the "set value" is determined based on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (gaming store) by the hall clerk operating the setting change switch 95. In addition, when a plurality of types of big hits are provided, it is possible to change the winning probability of all or some of the kinds of big hits which act as the trigger of the operation of the condition device, in accordance with the set value. For example, when there are four types of big hits, big hits 1 to 4, the higher the set value is, the higher all the winning probabilities of big hits 1 to 4 may be. It is also possible to increase only the winning probability of No. 1 and make the big hit 4 a common winning probability for all the set values (the total winning probability of the big hits 1 to 4 may be made high). Further, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the condition device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the big hit described above.

(About setting value change operation)
When the setting change switch 95 is turned on while the setting change operation is possible, the current display value of the setting display 97 is "1→2→3→4→5→6→1→2→3→... It can be switched to circulate in the range of 1 to 6, such as "." When the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on when the desired set value is reached, the current display value is confirmed as the set value. The setting value information is stored (stored) in a predetermined area (setting value storage area) of the RAM 203. Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change operable state ends. Therefore, the main control unit 20 serves as a set value selection unit that selects any set value from a plurality of types of set values based on the operation of a predetermined operation unit (setting key switch 94, setting change switch 95). Function.

Further, a performance indicator 99 is connected to the main controller 20, and the main controller 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display of the performance indicator 99.

(About game result information displayed on the performance display 99)
The performance indicator 99 functions as an information display means for displaying (notifying) information (hereinafter referred to as “performance information”) relating to the game result of a predetermined period (specific game period), and a plurality of 7-segment indicators (7). Segment LED). The performance indicator 99 according to the present embodiment has four 7-segment LEDs in which the display unit and the circuit unit are united side by side, and is mounted on, for example, the main control board 20 to display a 4-digit number. Configure possible indicators. Although details will be described later, the above-mentioned "performance information" is information that pachinko hall stores and related agencies want to confirm, and whether there is an illegal prize ball such as an excessive prize ball for a game machine or the original game machine Typical examples are information on performance and the like (predetermined information on game results). Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game itself when the player enjoys the game, unlike the notice production. Therefore, the performance indicator 99 is not installed at a location visible to the player, but is installed at a location easily visible inside the gaming machine. Specifically, the main control unit (so that the display unit of the performance indicator 99 composed of four 7-segment LEDs is hidden from the back of the game machine in a place easy to see, that is, hidden by a seal or a structure, becomes difficult to see. Main control board) 20, payout control board 28, launch control board 29, relay board, effect control section (effect control board (including liquid crystal control board)) 24, or a board case for protecting the control board It will be installed on top. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side so that a 4-digit number can be displayed, and each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP below the 7-segment number.

Here, specifically, the following information can be adopted as the performance information.
(1) The total number of payouts (total number of specified prize balls: α) paid out by winning in the specified state is divided by the total number of out balls in the specified state (number of specified out balls: β) Information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α/β) can be adopted as the performance information. Such specific ratio information is useful as an index for evaluating the payout performance of the gaming machine.
(1-1) The above-mentioned "total payout number" means when a prize is won at a winning opening (a middle starting opening 34, a right starting opening 33, a lower right starting opening 35, a general winning opening 43, and big winning openings 40, 50). It is the total value of the game balls (prize balls) paid out. In the case of the present embodiment, there are four middle starting openings 34, one right starting opening 33, two lower right starting openings 35, 15 upper special winning openings 40, 10 lower large winning openings 50, and general. The number of winning holes 43 is six. The total number of out balls is the number of game balls hit from the launching device 32 into the game area 3a (the number of game balls detected by the OUT monitoring switch 49a).
(1-2) Further, which state is to be adopted as the “specific state” can be appropriately determined according to the performance information to be acquired. According to the present embodiment, any of the normal state, latent probability state, time saving state, probability variation state, large hit game, small hit game, etc. can be adopted (details of each game state will be described later). To). Further, not only one state is the measurement target, but a plurality of types of states may be the measurement target. For example, a plurality of types of states such as a normal state and a latent probability state, a normal state and a small hit game, and all game states except during a hit game can be appropriately selected as measurement targets.
(1-3) Further, as the period in the specific state, instead of paying attention to each gaming state such as the normal state and the winning game, a period focusing on the big hit lottery probability may be set as the measurement target. For example, the period in which the jackpot lottery probability is in the low-probability state and/or the high-probability state may be set as the measurement target. In addition, the winning game by the big hit (during the big hit game) is controlled to a low probability state, and the winning game state at the time of winning continues during the hit game by the small hit (small hit game). Continued. For this reason, when it is desired to measure the period of a pure low probability state, the period other than during the big hit game may be measured. Further, when it is desired to measure the period of the low-probability state or the high-probability state excluding the hit game of both the big hit and the small hit, the period excluding the hit game may be set as the measurement target. The details of the big hit type, the small hit type, and the operation modes of these hit games will be described later.
(1-4) Further, as the "total payout number", one or a plurality of specific winning openings may be excluded from the measurement target as the total payout number (specific winning opening excluded total payout number). For example, of the respective winning openings, the ones in which the special winning openings 40 and 50 are excluded from the measurement target (in this case, the ones in which the hits are substantially excluded from the measurement become the total payout quantity) are set as the total payout quantity Good.

(2) In addition, it is also possible to measure only one of the total payout number, the specific payout port excluded total payout number, and the total outball number, and use the measurement result as the performance information.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts in the normal state (the normal time payout number) and the total number of out balls in the normal state (the normal time out number) are measured in real time, and the normal time payout number is calculated as the normal time out number. A value obtained by multiplying the value obtained by dividing by 100 by 100 (the number of regular-time payouts ÷ the number of regular-time outs x 100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as "base value") (the displayed value is the decimal point number). Display the value rounded to the first place). Therefore, the respective data of the normal-time payout number, the normal-time out number, and the base value are respectively stored (stored) in the corresponding areas of the RAM 203 (the normal-time payout number storage area, the normal-time out number storage area, and the specific ratio information storage area). It is supposed to be done. However, instead of simply permanently measuring and displaying the performance information, when the total number of out balls reaches a predetermined prescribed number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily stopped and The base value is stored as history information in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (this base value is stored). In the case of the present embodiment, the “specified number” that triggers the above-mentioned measurement end is not the normal out number, but the total out ball number during the entire gaming state (including per game) (hereinafter “total state out number”). It is adopted). The total number of out-of-states is also measured in real time and stored in a corresponding area of the RAM 203 (total-state out-number storage area). Hereinafter, unless otherwise required, the above-mentioned (normal time payout number storage area, normal time out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area, and all-state out number storage area are collectively referred to as “measurement information storage area”.

Then, as the historical information, after storing the current base value, the measurement information storage area used in the current measurement is cleared, and the next normal time payout number, normal time out number, base value and total state out ball number Start measurement. As a result, the next performance information is measured and stored in real time.

On the performance indicator 99, the previous base value as the history information and the base value currently being measured in real time are alternately switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (simultaneous display is possible. May be). In the case of the present embodiment, among the four 7-segment LEDs, the two 7-segment LEDs on the front left half are the base values (real-time base value: first base value) being measured in real time or the previous base values. (History base value: second base value) is used as an “identification display unit (identification segment)” that displays identification information that can be identified, and two 7-segment LEDs on the front right half display the base value. The base display (ratio segment)' is used. When the real-time base value is displayed on the base display unit, for example, ““bL.” is displayed on the identification display unit, and when the history base value is displayed on the base display unit, the identification display unit is displayed, for example. “B6.” is displayed (identification display). The base value is rounded off to the first decimal place and then displayed on the numerical display section. When the rounded value is three digits or more, "99." indicating overflow is displayed on the base display section. Note that the history base value is not limited to the previous base value, and may be configured to be able to display the base value for a specific number of times such as the number of times before two times or the number of times before (three times before). Whether to display can be appropriately determined. Further, regarding the performance indicator 99, if the configuration is such that at least the real-time base value and the previous history base value can be displayed, what kind of display mode the base value is displayed, and the switching display form thereof, It is also free to use a periodic switching display form or another display form.

Further, the main control unit 20 is capable of transmitting various effect control commands including information regarding a special symbol variable display game and information regarding an error to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. However, in order to prevent the goto act, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and has a one-way communication configuration in which the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. ..

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a built-in CPU 241 (effect control CPU), and has a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) storing effect data required for effect control processing and a RAM 243 (functioning as a work area or buffer memory). Mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with a production control RAM), and further provided with an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), a counter circuit, an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, etc. Control the overall production operation.

The main role of the effect control unit 24 is to receive an effect control command from the main control unit 20, to select and determine an effect based on the effect control command, to control the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36 which is an effect means, and to make a sound from the speaker 46. Control, light emission control of the decoration lamp 45 and various LEDs (button LED 13b, other effect LED (not shown)), operation control of the movable body accessory 80, 90, and the like.

The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is a VDP that controls overall image output processing such as image expansion processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) for which the VDP performs image expansion processing, and a VDP expansion. VRAM (Video RAM) for temporarily storing the generated image data, a liquid crystal control CPU for outputting control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, a program describing a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU, and a program therefor. A liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory are mainly configured.

In addition, the effect control unit 24 includes a decorative lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45) and various effect LEDs in order to bring out various effects (light effect, sound effect, and movable body effect by a movable body accessory). An optical display control unit for the device 45a, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, a drive control unit (motor drive) for a movable body accessory motor 80c for operating a movable body accessory (not shown). Circuit) etc. The effect control unit 24 is capable of transmitting control signals related to effect means to these control units.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the operation of the movable body accessory, and the effect control unit 24, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, the current operation of the movable body accessory. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, the malfunction of the operation of the movable body accessory is monitored, and if the malfunction occurs, this is notified as an error.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to an effect button switch 13a that detects an operation of the effect button 13 and a direction key switch (not shown) that detects an operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d), and the effect control is performed. The section 24 can receive operation detection signals from the effect buttons 13 and the direction keys 75.

Based on the production control command sent from the main control unit 20, the production control unit 24 randomly or uniquely determines from among a plurality of types of production patterns prepared in advance, and performs various production means at necessary timing. Control to bring out the desired performance. As a result, display of an effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, reproduction of sound from the speaker 46, and lighting/blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative pattern variation display operation and The "drafting scenario" in a broad sense is realized by deploying the notice production in time series.

In addition, the effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte long mode (MODE) and a 1-byte long event (EVENT). Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid information, strobe signals are output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, if there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs the mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal of is transmitted. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after a lapse of the predetermined time from the setting. The strobe signal is controlled by the CPU 201 to be in an active state for a predetermined period in which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes the control program for the command reception interrupt process, so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt process. Has become. Further, unlike the CPU 201, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (a timer interrupt process that is regularly executed) based on another interrupt when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs at the same time.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a game operation of the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Design variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variable display game, decorative symbol variable display game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on a predetermined starting condition, specifically, the game ball enters the middle starting opening 34, the right starting opening 33, or the lower right starting opening 35 (the prize). In the main control unit 20, a "big hit lottery" is performed by a random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variably displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined time elapses, displays the result as a special symbol. The special symbol variable display game is terminated by displaying the display on the device.

Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the medium starting opening 34 or the right starting opening 33 and the jackpot drawing based on the winning of the lower right starting opening 35 are separately and independently performed. Therefore, the big starting lottery results for the middle starting opening 34 and the right starting opening 33 are derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big winning lottery results for the lower right starting opening 35 are derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. .. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display is provided on the condition that the game ball has entered the middle starting opening 34 or the right starting opening 33. The game starts. On the other hand, on the side of the special symbol display device 38b, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on condition that the game ball has entered the lower right starting opening 35. Has become. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after the predetermined variation display time has elapsed, the jackpot lottery result is "hit (big hit, small hit)" In a predetermined "hit" mode, in other cases, in a predetermined "lose" mode, the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, and thereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived and displayed. Has become.

In the present specification, for convenience of description, the first special symbol variable display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variable display game 1", and the second on the special symbol display device 38b side. The special symbol variable display game is referred to as "special symbol variable display game 2". Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (abbreviated as "special symbol" in some cases), and "special symbol variable display game 1" and "special symbol" The symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as "special symbol variation display game".

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variable display game is started, the decorative symbol variable display game is started by variably displaying the decorative symbol (dramatic game symbol) on the liquid crystal display device 36, and accompanying this. Then various productions are developed. Then, when the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device shows a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variable display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variable display game including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variable display game is "big hit" (when the big hit lottery result is "big hit"), the effect reflecting the result is developed in the decorative symbol variable display game. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, 7-segment display state of "7"), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left" "middle" "right". In each display area of “”, the display pattern in which the decorative pattern reflects “big hit” (for example, in each of the display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, three decorative patterns are “7”, “7”, “ It is stopped and displayed in the display state of "7").

If this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variable display game ends, and the decorative symbol variable display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol aspect of "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the upper special winning opening solenoid 42c (see FIG. 3) provided in the first special variation winning device 42 operates to open and close the opening door 42b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby opening and closing the upper special winning opening 40. Or, the lower special winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the second special variation winning device 52 is operated and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined operation pattern, whereby the lower special winning opening 50 is opened and closed, and a special game state (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this big hit game, until the opening time of the special winning opening reaches a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 28.5 seconds), or the number of game balls won in the special winning opening (winning ball to the big winning opening) Is a predetermined number (maximum winning number: the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening which is opened or expanded by one operation of a winning character: for example, 15 (upper winning opening 40) "Round game" in which the prize area is opened or expanded until the number of prizes reaches 10 (lower major prize hole 50), and the prize hole is closed when either of these conditions is satisfied, The prescribed number of defined rounds (for example, 16 rounds at the maximum) is repeated.

When the big hit game starts, an opening effect is first notified to the effect that the big hit has started, and after the opening effect ends, a round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds set in advance as an upper limit. Then, after the specified number of rounds, an ending effect is given to notify that the big hit is ended, whereby the big hit game is ended. That is, the big hit game is roughly divided into an opening effect period, a round game execution period with the maximum number of rounds as an upper limit, and an ending effect period.

Regarding the information necessary to execute the above decorative symbol variable display game, the main control unit 20 first determines that the game ball has entered (winning) the right starting opening 33, the middle starting opening 34 or the lower right starting opening 35. Based, specifically, "big hit", "small hit", on condition that the starting ball sensor 33a, 34a, or 35a detects the game ball and the starting condition (starting condition concerning the special symbol) is satisfied, Or, it is a "winning lottery (winning/winning type lottery)" in which a lottery is drawn, and if it is a "big hit", the big hit type is selected, and if it is a "small win", the small hit type is selected. , If it is "miss", perform a big hit lottery including "symbol lottery (winning type (winning type) lottery)" that lottery the lose type (if there is one kind of big hit, small hit, or lose, Since there is no need to perform a type lottery, the lottery may be omitted), based on the lottery result information, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol that is finally stopped and displayed according to the winning type (hereinafter, " "Special stop symbol") is determined. Then, as a production control command for specifying the processing state, a "variation pattern designation command" including at least variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, information regarding the jackpot lottery result and the variation time of the special symbol) is provided to the production control unit 24 side. Send. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variable display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to make the variation of the production rich, a "decorative symbol designating command" including the information of the special stop symbol (symbol lottery result information (information on the hit type)) is also transmitted to the production control unit 24. It is like this.

The variation pattern information of the special symbol may include information for designating whether or not a specific notice effect (for example, “reach effect” or “pseudo continuous effect” described later) is generated. In detail, the variation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a “hit variation pattern” in the case of a hit and a “lost variation pattern” in the case of a hit according to the jackpot lottery result. For example, a'reach variation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of reach production, a'normal variation pattern' that does not specify the production of reach production, a'reach variation pattern with pseudo-relation' that specifies the occurrence of pseudo continuous production and reach production, and a pseudo A plurality of types of variation patterns are included, such as a "normal variation pattern with pseudo-relation" that specifies the occurrence of continuous production but not the occurrence of reach production. In order to secure the production time of the reach production and the pseudo continuous production, basically, the reach variation pattern or the variation pattern with pseudo continuous production is set to have a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern.

The effect control unit 24, based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 20, in time series during the decorative symbol variable display game. Determine the contents of the effect to be developed (drafting scenario such as notice effect) and the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern), and display the decorative pattern in a variable manner according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbol and decorate it. The symbol variable display game is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols are variably displayed by the liquid crystal display device 36 in synchronism with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. The period is substantially the same as the period. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the optical display device 45a, or the sound generating device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variable display game. As a result, reproduction of an image on the liquid crystal display device 36 (image effect), reproduction of a sound effect (sound effect), and lighting/blinking of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED (light effect) are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variable display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variable display game. The two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the above two symbol variable display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variable display game” unless otherwise necessary.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol variable display game)
Further, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 37 (winning), the main control unit 20 performs a "assisted winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a certain period of time, the result is a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. It is designed to stop and display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variable display game is "auxiliary hit", the display portion of the normal symbol display device 39a is in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are in a lighting state, or "○" and "○"). Among the LEDs expressing “X”, the LED on the “◯” side is stopped and displayed.

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated and the movable piece 47 opens and closes in a predetermined operation pattern, whereby the right starting port 33 is opened. As a result, the game ball becomes easy to flow into (starting mouth open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "general electric open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (normal state) occurs. In this normal electric open game, the movable piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 allows the opening time of the right starting opening 33 to elapse for a predetermined time, or the number of game balls won in the right starting opening 33 is a predetermined number (for example, (4 pieces), the winning area is opened, and when any of these conditions is satisfied, the right starting opening 33 is closed. The condition for closing the right starting opening 33 is not limited to this, and may be based on only the opening time of the right starting opening 33, or only based on the number of game balls won in the right starting opening 33. It may be.

Here, in the present embodiment, during the special/decorative symbol variable display game, the normal symbol variable display game, the big hit game, or the normal electric open game, etc., each starting port 33 to 35 or the normal symbol starting port 37 is won. If, that is, there is an input of a detection signal from the starting mouth sensors 33a to 35a or the normal symbol starting mouth sensor 37a, and the corresponding starting condition (symbol game starting condition) is satisfied, start this variable display game. As the data relating to the right, except the data relating to the variable display, the maximum reserved storage number (for example, maximum 4) which is a predetermined upper limit value is reserved and stored. The on-hold data that has not been used for the symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the on-hold data is also referred to as an "operation holding ball". In order to clarify the number of operation reserve balls to the player, a dedicated hold indicator (not shown) provided in an appropriate place of the gaming machine 1 or a hold display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the display.

In the present embodiment, the special symbols 1, the special symbols 2, and the operation-reserving spheres related to the normal symbols are stored in the corresponding storage areas of the RAM 203 up to a maximum of 4, respectively, and are retained as the number of fluctuations of the special symbols or the normal symbols. In addition, the maximum storage number (maximum storage number) of each operation holding ball number concerning the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. Further, all or a part of the maximum reserved memory number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game property.

(Simultaneous fluctuation type: Fig. 7 (a))
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the variable display operation of the special symbol 1 on the special symbol display device 38a and the variable display operation of the special symbol 2 on the special symbol display device 38b can be independently executed. Has become. That is, the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the variable display of the special symbol 2 can be executed in parallel, which is a configuration of a so-called "simultaneous variable type" pachinko gaming machine. In the case of this simultaneous change type, since both special symbols can be displayed in parallel in a variable display operation, for example, during the execution of the hit game targeting one special symbol, the variation time of the other special symbol A case may occur in which the game is stopped at a hit design (a design showing a big hit (a big hit design) or a design showing a small hit (a small hit design)). However, since the winning game is executed for one of the special symbols 1 and 2, it is not possible to execute the winning game for both the special symbols 1 and 2. Therefore, it is necessary to devise a method in which both the special symbols 1 and 2 are big hit symbols and are not stopped and displayed at the same time (during confirmation display, during winning game, etc.).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7(a), for example, when the variable display of the special symbols 1 and 2 is executed in parallel, the variation time of one special symbol ends and the other special symbols precede In the case where the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation time is forcibly ended even if the other special symbol is being variably displayed, and stopped with the symbol indicating the loss (missing symbol) (forced loss stop control). In addition, when one special symbol is hit and stopped and displayed first, the variable display is continued while the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is interrupted (it is not stopped and displayed), and the one special symbol is displayed. When restarting the measurement after the hit game related to the winning symbol is finished, it is not necessary to forcibly stop with the lost symbol (measurement interruption control). However, in the case where one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol first, there is no problem even if the other special symbol hits and stops after that, so the fluctuation is continued. In the present embodiment, a simultaneous variation type of "forcible loss during big hit/measurement interruption during small hit" is adopted in which forced loss is stopped in the case of a big hit and measurement is interrupted in the case of a small hit.

(3-2. Game state)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned big hit which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the occurrence of various game states will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" in which the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) plays a functional part thereof. There are two types of probability variation function related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probability variation function") and probability variation function related to normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol probability variation function").

The special symbol probability variation function changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability (for example, 1/320) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/137), which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. This is a function to generate a "high probability state". Further, the normal symbol probability changing function, the probability per lottery per auxiliary is a predetermined probability (normal probability) from a low probability (for example, 1/200) to a high probability (for example, 199/200), from the normal game state. Is also a function to generate an advantageous "auxiliary contact probability change state".

In addition, the main control unit 20 is provided with a “variable time reduction function (time reduction function)” that functions as the functional unit. There are two types of time saving functions related to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time saving functions") and time saving functions related to ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol time saving functions").

Special symbol time saving function generates "special symbol time saving state" to shorten the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (average time from start of variation of special symbol to stop display) It is a function to let. Under the gaming state where the special symbol time saving function is operating (special symbol time saving state), the average variation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened, and a big hit per unit time than in the normal gaming state. The lottery number is improved so that the lottery number is improved. In addition, the normal symbol time saving function shortens the average time required for one normal symbol variable display game (the average time from when the normal symbol starts to change until it is stopped) "ordinary symbol time saving state" It is a function to generate. Under the gaming state in which the normal symbol time saving function is operating (normal symbol time saving state), the average variation time of the normal symbol in one ordinary symbol variable display game is shortened, and the assistance per unit time is shorter than in the normal game state. The lottery number is improved so that the number of winning lottery is improved. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of operation-holding balls, but in this case, the time saving function does not operate, This is due to another control process.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an "open extension function" in which the main controller 20 plays a functional part thereof. The opening extension function is a function of generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period of the movable piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 (at least one of the opening time of the movable piece 47 and the number of times of opening thereof) is extended. This open extension state is called a so-called "electricity support state". Under the game state (open extension state) in which the above-mentioned extension extension function is operating, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable piece 47 is extended from 0.1 seconds to 3.7 seconds, for example, and The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from once (when the opening extension function is not in operation) to three times (when the opening extension function is in operation), and the operation of the movable piece 47 per unit time than in the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved so that the rate is improved.

By operating one or more kinds of each of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the special symbol probability variation function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time saving function, and the game state in which the opening extension function operates are referred to as "probability variation state", and from among these functions A game state in which the special symbol probability changing function is removed is called a "time saving state", and a game state in which at least the special symbol probability changing function operates and the opening extension function does not operate is called a "latent probability state (latent probability)". In addition, a state in which all functions are not in operation (non-operation) is called a "normal game state (normal state)". Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, the jackpot lottery probability is'low probability' when the gaming state is the “time saving state” or the “normal state”, and the gaming state is the “latent probability state”. Alternatively, in the case of the “probably changed state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability”.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol time saving function is activated in the probability changing state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state. During the latent probability state, the special symbol time saving function according to special figure 2 is activated, and special figure 2 is set as the special symbol time saving state.

Further, under the above-mentioned electric choo support state (hereinafter, referred to as “state with electric power support”), the operating rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, and the right starting port 33 is opened. Since the winning rate is increased and the winning frequency per unit time is increased, the gaming state is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where it is not in the electric choo support state (hereinafter, referred to as “no electric support state”). Focusing on the presence or absence of this electric Chu support state, when the game state is "normal game state" or "latent probability state", it becomes "no electric support" and the game state is "time saving state" or "probability variation state" If it is, the state is “with electric power support”. Game state focusing on the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, ordinary symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support Is referred to as the "internal game state". Regarding the operation status of each function, the main control unit 20 side manages the operation/non-operation by the ON/OFF status of the flag corresponding to each function, and the internal game status type is also “game status number YJ”. (YJ=normally “00H”, time saving “01H”, latent probability “02H”, probability variation “03H”, etc.)” is used for management.

In addition, during the big hit, a hit game (big hit game) in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but with respect to each of the above-mentioned functions, all the functions are deactivated, and basically, in the same game state as the normal state described above. Placed in. However, during a small-hit hit game (small-hit game), it is different from the above-mentioned big-hit game. Even during the small hit game, the big winning opening is opened and closed as in the big hit game, but when the small hit is won, the internal game state itself is not changed. That is, during the small hitting game, the game state at the time of winning the small hit is continued. For example, if you win a small hit during the short-lived state, you will be placed under the short-lived state during the small hit, and if you win a small hit during the latent probability state, it will be placed under the latent probability during the small hit game. ..

<4. About hit>
Next, referring to FIG. 4, the “hit” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. About hit type and hit game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the types of hits that are drawn in the special symbol variable display game, that is, the jackpot types targeted for the jackpot lottery, "big hit 1-8", small hit type There are multiple types of hits such as "small hits" belonging to. The notations such as "16R" and "8R" shown in the figure respectively indicate the specified round number (maximum round number). Note that a plurality of types of loss (misses A, B, and C) are provided as the “miss” types other than the big hit and the small hit (see FIG. 35). Further, although there is only one kind of small hit, plural kinds may be provided.

The big hit type is a hit that triggers the operation of the condition device, and the "small hit" is a hit that belongs to the "non-big hit" type that does not trigger the actuation of the condition device. Here, the "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, in which a specific combination of special symbols is displayed, or a game ball. If you pass through a specific area in the special winning opening (excluding those that win the special winning opening while the continuous function device is operating). The "feature continuous operation device" means a device that can continuously operate the special electric accessory. The "special electric accessory" refers to an electric accessory that opens or expands the entrance of the special winning opening. Therefore, in the case of a small hit, the round game itself is not executed, and the big prize is given in an operation mode that is the same as or similar to the round game by the big hit (pseudo round game), or an operation mode that is completely different from the round game by the big hit. The opening and closing movements of the mouth are controlled. Both the big hit type and the small hit type are hits that are transition triggers to the special game state (opening trigger of the hit game) accompanied by opening and closing of the special winning opening. In this respect, the small hits are , It's different from mere “miss”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the jackpot 1-4 is a jackpot lottery target of the special symbol 1 side, the jackpot 5-8 and the jackpot is a jackpot lottery target of the special symbol 2 side, in the present embodiment Only on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol variable display game 2 side), it is possible to win the small hit.

Further, the jackpots 1 to 8 are designed so that the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished is determined according to the gaming state at the time of winning. For example, jackpot 1 is shifted to "latent probability state (high probability, no electric support)" regardless of which gaming state is when winning, and jackpot 2 is when the gaming state at winning is normal. In the case, the state is shifted to the “probability change state (high probability, with electric support)”, and in the case of latent probability/time reduction/probability variation state, it is transferred to the “potential change state”. In addition, the big hits 4 and 8 are big hits that trigger a shift to a time saving state (low probability, there is electric power support). , And in the case of latent accuracy/time saving/probability variation status, it is transferred to “time saving status B (7 times of time saving)”. Other jackpots 3, 6 to 7 are as shown in FIG.

In addition, the jackpots 1 to 8 are “long opening time”, which is a time width in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game can reach the maximum number of winnings (9 pieces). (For example, 29.8 seconds)" is set to "long open big hit". Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the profit state during the big hit game becomes higher as the maximum number of rounds is relatively large. In addition, in relation to the winning rate, a part of the big hit is a "short open big hit" in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game is "short open time (for example, 0.1 seconds)". It may be provided. In this short opening big hit, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is very short, so that it is possible to make a big hit with little chance of winning (may be impossible to win). Further, the maximum number of rounds can be appropriately determined for any of the jackpots.

Regarding the “latent probability state”, the “probability variation state”, and the “time saving state” according to the present embodiment, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (variation number of special symbols) is a predetermined prescribed number (special symbol variation display game). 1 and 2 (total number of times of variation of special symbols 1 and 2) is continued until it is completed, and within the specified number of times when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the big hit (excluding the small hit), The next game is shifted to the normal state (normal game state). In the case of the present embodiment, a predetermined specified number of times (ST specified number of times) is set in the latent probability state or the probability changed state (multi-cut type (ST machine type)), and the time saving state is 7 times (in the case of time saving state A) or 50 times (in the case of time saving state B) is set. The latent probability state or the probability variation state may be a “general probability variation type” in which the high probability state is continued until the next big hit is won, instead of setting the ST prescribed number of times. In addition, the time saving state can be set to an appropriate number (for example, 100 times). In addition, the transition to the latent probability state or the probability variation state may be performed on condition that a game ball has entered a specific area within the special winning opening (V probability variation machine type).

(About winning game by small hit)
In a winning game based on a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a "small hit game"), the lower special winning opening 50 is opened once or plural times (in the present embodiment, once). Here, since the "small hit" is a hit type that does not act as an actuation trigger of the "condition device" as described above, a round game like "big hit" is not executed. That is, the opening/closing operation of the lower prize winning opening 50 during the small hit game is a pseudo round game. Here, when the lower special winning opening 50 is opened once due to a legal request, the lower special winning opening 50 may be opened multiple times when the opening is repeated a plurality of times. It is stipulated that the total of the opening times does not exceed 1.8 seconds. Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the opening time of the special winning opening 50 is set to 1.2 seconds. This opening time is set as an opening time that allows one to several game balls to be won in consideration of the arrangement pattern (not shown) of the game nails, the flow path correction plates 37d, 40d, and the like. Further, regarding the closing condition of the lower big winning opening 50 in the small hit game, when the maximum opening and closing operation time of the lower big winning opening 50 has passed, or the number of game balls winning the lower big winning opening 50 is the maximum winning number (for example, , 9) is reached, or one of the conditions is satisfied. In the case of the present embodiment, since the number of gaming balls won in the maximum winning opening 50 does not reach the maximum winning number within the maximum opening/closing operation time (within 1.2 seconds), the actual maximum winning amount is actually lower. After 1.2 seconds of the maximum opening/closing operation time of the mouth 50 has passed, specifically, after a series of opening/closing operations of the special winning opening is executed, the small hit game is ended.

Moreover, after the small hit game by the small hit, the internal game state at the time of the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the internal game state caused by the small hit is not performed. Therefore, the internal game state at the time of winning the small hit and the internal game state after the small hit game are both the same internal game state. In this respect, the property is different from the "big hit" in which the transition control of the internal game state can be performed.

The small hit may be one kind or plural kinds. When a plurality of types of small hits are provided, it is preferable that the small hit game modes are different. For example, when at least a first small hit and a second small hit are provided, the first small hit executes a small hit game with a big winning opening time of 1.0 seconds, and the second small hit hits the first small hit. It is possible to execute a small hit game, which is shorter than the hit and has a big winning opening time of 0.5 seconds. In this way, by providing a plurality of small hits that execute small hit games with different opening times of the special winning opening, it is possible to add intonation or speed to the speed of increase in the number of small hit rushes described later, which is interesting for the game. Can be improved. When a plurality of types of small hits are provided, the winning probabilities thereof can be appropriately determined. If it is a game that gives a sense of increased speed of ball launch, the small hit type with a relatively long opening time of the special winning opening is set to a high probability (in the above example, the first small hit is larger than the second small hit). High probability), if the game is a game that slows down the speed of increasing the number of exits, set the small hit type with a relatively short opening time of the special winning opening to a high probability (in the above example, the first small hit) Is set to have a lower probability than the second small hit). Further, the type of jackpot can be appropriately determined according to the playability.

<5. About production ＞
(5-1. Performance mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes that produce effects related to the game state, and is configured to be capable of transition control between the effect modes in response to the transition of the game state. ing. The production mode includes a "normal production mode" that corresponds to the "normal state", a "latent probability production mode (small hit rush production mode)" that corresponds to the "potential confirmation state", and a "probability variation production" that corresponds to the "probability variation state". There are provided a plurality of types of effect modes corresponding to each game state, such as "mode" and "time saving effect mode" corresponding to "time saving effect".

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) for controlling transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 specifies a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, the current game state, or specifies that the game state is transferred. Based on the effect control command, it is configured to be able to control transition between a plurality of kinds of effect modes in a manner that maintains consistency with the game state on the main control unit 20 side. The specific effect control commands include a variation pattern designation command, a game state designation command, a demo display command 1, a demo display command 2, and a predetermined command transmitted during a hit (a big hit start command that specifies a big hit start, or a big hit end). There is a big hit end command to specify). In addition, the production control unit 24 has a functional unit (production state management means) that manages the production mode related to the game state. The effect control unit 24 (effect state management means) manages the current effect mode while maintaining consistency with the main control unit 20 side.

(5-2. Production under each production mode)
In addition, in each effect mode, the background as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern in each effect mode, so that the player can understand what kind of game state he/she is staying under The display is controlled to be switched to different background effects. Also, the background effect is not limited to be changed according to each effect mode, and each effect mode can be changed by using a decorative pattern of a different pattern corresponding to each effect mode or changing sound effect or light effect. It can also be suggested.

(5-3. Notice production)
Next, the notice production will be described. The effect control unit 24, based on the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, the fluctuation pattern information included in at least the fluctuation pattern designation command, various related to the current effect mode and the jackpot lottery result. It is configured so that the "notice production" can be controlled to appear. Such a notice effect suggests (announces) the degree of expectation (winning expectation) of whether or not the winning type has been won, and works as a “inspiring effect” to fuel the player's expectation of winning. Typical examples of the notice production include "reach production" and "pseudo continuous production" as well as "prefetch notice production" and player participation type production. The effect control unit 24 includes a notice effect control means capable of executing (appearing) these effects.

The “reach effect” means an effect mode involving a reach state, and specifically, an effect mode in which a game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. For the reach effect, a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the expected winning degree, for example, a reach effect with a relatively low expected winning degree such as N reach (normal reach), and a relatively high expected degree of winning with respect to the N reach. Reach effect (SP reach effect) is included. Many of the “SP reach” have a relatively long production time (fluctuation time) compared to N reach in order to fuel the player's expectation of winning. The SP reach includes, for example, a normal SP reach that develops from N reach to SP reach, an evolved SP reach that develops from N reach to SP reach, and further develops to another SP reach.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of N reach such as “N reach 1 to 2” are included in the N reach, and a plurality of types such as “SP reach A to C, weak SP reach, strong SP reach” are included in the SP reach. There are different types of SP reach. Further, regarding the relationship of the expectation of winning, the relationships of “N reach 1<N reach 2” and “SP reach A<SP reach B<SP reach C” are given. N reach and SP reach include various types of reach depending on the game state (see FIGS. 34 to 36 described later).

"Pseudo continuous production" refers to a production mode involving a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of a decorative design. This "pseudo-variation" means that a part or all of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (including the reach state and the non-reach state) in the decorative symbol variable display game, and the decorative symbol is changed again from the temporarily stopped state. It refers to a variable display mode in which a display operation of performing a display operation is repeated once or a plurality of times. In this respect, it is different from the “prefetching notice effect (continuous notice effect)” which will be described later and which is spread over a plurality of symbol variable display games. The occurrence rate of such "pseudo-run" is basically set so that the higher the number of pseudo fluctuations, the higher the expectation of winning. The likelihood of occurrence of reach C (high-expectancy SP reach) is increasing.

In addition, the "prefetch notice effect" is mainly for the hold display mode or the hold display mode for the operation holding balls (undigested operation holding balls) that are not yet used for the execution of the symbol variable display game (variable display operation of the special symbol). This is an effect mode in which the expectation of winning regarding the operation-holding ball can be notified in advance by using the background effect of the symbol variation display game executed first. In the symbol variable display game, various effects such as so-called "character notice effect" and "step-up notice effect" are generated in addition to the above-mentioned "reach effect", and the game contents are lively.

Here, the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment including the prefetching notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the upper display area in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, a display area for displaying the decorative symbol variable display game (variable display effect of decorative symbol and notice effect are displayed. Display area for) is provided, and in the display area on the lower side of the screen, a special display 1 (holding display area a1 to d1) and a special display 1 A holding display area 77 (holding display portions a2 to d2) for displaying the number of operation holding balls on the second side is provided. With respect to the presence/absence of the operation holding ball, that effect is notified by a predetermined hold display mode. In the figure, the presence or absence of the operation-holding sphere is lit (with the operation-holding sphere: “○ (white circle) in the figure”) or extinguished (without the operation-holding sphere: broken circle in the figure), the current operation is held An example in which information regarding the number of balls is reported is shown.

The display regarding whether or not there are operation-holding balls (holding display) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (prize order), and in each holding display area 76, 77, the leftmost holding ball is all the operations in the holding display. It is displayed as the operation hold ball that occurred first (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among the hold balls. Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76, 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold balls currently used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured such that an image in which the icon of the game in-hold K currently used for the game appears on the icon of the seat J is displayed. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the game running hold K. As an icon, the icon moves to the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When the operation-holding ball is generated, the main controller 20 reads the pre-reading determination information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation-holding balls at the time of the pre-reading determination (the number of existing operation-holding balls, including the operation-holding ball generated this time). The "hold addition command" designating "and" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see step S361 in FIG. 17). The above-mentioned hold addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte side data (prize command 2 (MODE)) that can specify the number of operation holding balls at the time of prefetch determination and the lower byte that can specify the prefetch determination information. It is composed of side data (winning command 2 (EVENT)) (see FIG. 17).

When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, based on the readahead determination information included in this command, as a part of the display control process related to the above hold display, the effect control process related to the "readahead notice effect" is performed. Specifically, based on the information included in the hold addition command, a pre-reading notice lottery is performed to select whether or not the pre-reading notice production can be executed. The special hold display mode of 1) is displayed. The probability of winning by the pre-reading notice lottery is higher in the case of "big hit" than in "miss" and in the case of the reach type with relatively high expectation of winning, and the pre-reading notice production occurs. Depending on whether or not there is a big win or a specific win type, the expected degree of winning is shown.

Here, the look-ahead determination information is specifically related to the jackpot lottery result (the jackpot lottery result at the start of fluctuation) executed when the operation-holding ball is provided in the symbol variation display game in the main controller 20. Information, or information about the pre-reading variation pattern obtained when the change pattern at the start of variation is pre-reading determined, that is, the pre-reading determination information includes at least the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading winning result) of the winning lottery result at the start of variation. In addition to the information, it is possible to include the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading symbol result) information of the symbol lottery result and the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading variation pattern) information of the variation pattern at the start of variation. What kind of information including the pending addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined according to the content to be notified in the pre-reading notice. It should be noted that the "prefetch variation pattern" obtained by the pre-reading determination when the operation-holding sphere occurs does not necessarily have to be the "variation pattern at the start of variation" itself obtained when the operation-holding sphere is subjected to the variation display operation. .. For example, if the variation pattern at the start of variation is a variation pattern designating "pseudo N (N=2, 3)+SP reach A", the content designated by the look-ahead variation pattern is "pseudo N+SP reach A". It is also possible to specify that it is not the type of reach production itself, which is the main point, but the “SP reach A type” that is the essence.

In the case of this embodiment, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice is given is, for example, a normal hold display. Look-ahead of "hold display change system" such as changing from white in (normal hold display mode) to special hold colors and colors such as blue, green, red, and rainbow in advance notice display (special hold display mode) Notice production is performed. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the operation holding balls in the hatched holding display portion b1 are changed to the special holding display. Here, the blue, green, red, and iridescent display of the hold icon means that there is a high expectation of winning in the order of this color, and the iridescent hold icon display in particular indicates a big hit (confirmed). It is a premium hold icon (preliminary reservation notice) to be displayed. Therefore, this hold display section functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of operation hold. However, when the prefetching notice effect is executed, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined lookahead notice display mode (special hold display mode). However, this works as a means for generating a prefetching notice effect. The existing operation-holding balls are sequentially digested when the symbol variable display game is executed. At this time, in order to express that one operation-holding ball has been exhausted, the display position of the hold display unit corresponding to the existing operation-holding ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Although the control (shift display) is performed, the above-described hold display mode different from the normal display is continuously displayed while changing the display position of the hold display during this period.

Next, the player participation type effect will be described. The player participation type effect is an effect mode that belongs to a so-called "button notice effect", in which the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, an operation such as pressing, long pressing, repeated hits) on the effect button 13 (operating means). This is a notice presentation mode in which the contents of the presentation can change based on the above. In the player participation type effect, when a predetermined button effective period is reached, an operation instruction effect for instructing a predetermined operation to the effect button 13 appears, and when the effect button 13 is operated during the button effective period, The appearance mode that appears is changed to another effect mode (operation effect) (for example, the character display changes, a special sound effect or light effect is generated, etc.), and the effect mode before and after the operation (effect content) According to the above, there is a notice production mode for giving a notice of the expected winning degree.

(For front and back variations: Fig. 7 (b))
Since the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is a simultaneous variation type, the decorative symbol variation display game corresponding to each of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, but two symbols Simultaneously displaying the effects related to the variable display game is bothersome for the player, and causes confusion as to which of the symbol variable display games should be focused on. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the special symbols 1 and 2 are changing at the same time (both the special symbol changing display games 1 and 2 are being executed), depending on the gaming state, a symbol relating to one of the special symbols The effect of the variable display game is made to appear preferentially. For example, in the normal state, since the game is advanced aiming for a prize in the middle starting opening 34, the symbol variable display game 1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 side becomes dominant, while on the other hand, in the case of the latent state In the latent state, since the game is advanced aiming for winning at the lower right starting opening 35, the symbol variable display game 2 corresponding to the special symbol 2 side becomes dominant. Considering this point, if it is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the time saving state, the effect is the decorative symbol variable display game 1 as the main effect (effect on the table variable display state (table variable state) side). If it is in the latent state, the decorative symbol variable display game 2 is made to appear as the main effect (see the corresponding relationship in FIG. 7B). For example, in the normal state, since the special symbol 1 is in the table variation state, the variable display operation of the decorative symbol related to the decorative symbol variable display game 1 and the notice effect are displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Therefore, if the current gaming state is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the time saving state, the main effect is intended for the symbol variation display game 1 (special figure 1 table variation state), in principle, symbol variation. The notice effect (reach effect, etc.), the hold icon, and the decorative design targeting the display game 2 are not displayed (the special figure 2 reverse state). If the current gaming state is a latent state, the main effect is intended for the symbol variable display game 2 (special figure 2 table variable state), and the notice effect for the symbol variable display game 1 (reach effect, etc.) ), a hold icon, and a decorative pattern are not displayed (special figure 1 back fluctuation state). However, in the case of the present embodiment, the effect on the back variation display state (back variation state) is not displayed at all, and for example, in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 36, a sub-effect (a sub-effect other than the main effect ( As a sub effect, a dedicated display area 160 for the number of reserved symbols related to the special symbols 1 and 2 and the presence or absence of variable display is provided (see, for example, reference numeral 160 in FIGS. 31A to 31G). Hereinafter, for convenience of description, the front fluctuation state may be abbreviated as “front fluctuation” and the back fluctuation state may be abbreviated as “back fluctuation”.

In addition, when it is assumed that the player is left-handed in the game state (during a winning game, a latent probability state, a time saving state, a probability variation state), the effect control unit 24, for example, When there is a prize in the middle start opening 34, a "right-handed warning notification effect" is displayed to warn the player that he/she will hit the right-hand side. If it is assumed that the player is hitting, for example, if there is a winning in the winning combination gate 57, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the right starting opening 33, or the lower right starting opening 35, the player is instructed to hit left. It is provided with a warning notification control means for displaying a "left-handed warning notification effect" for warning.

(5-4. Production means)
Various effects in the gaming machine 1 are revealed by the effecting means arranged in the gaming machine. Such a rendering means may be a stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a rendering effect by appealing to human perceptions such as sight, hearing, and tactile sense, and a light generating means (light rendering means) such as the decorative lamp 45 and the LED device. ), a sound generating device (sound effecting means) such as a speaker 46, an effect display device (displaying means) such as a liquid crystal display device 36, a pressurizing device for transmitting a contact pressure to the operator's body, and a wind pressure to the player's body. A wind pressure device or a movable body accessory that produces a visual effect by its operation is a typical example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that is visually appealing like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes a device that does not depend on the image (for example, a 7-segment display device). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type in which an effect is displayed by displaying an image, and a device such as a 7-segment display device that displays an effect other than an image is included in the concept of the effect display device.

<6. Game state transition: Figure 6>
Next, the transition of the game state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, in the present embodiment, the game is controlled in the “normal state”, the “latent probability state”, the “time saving state”, and the “probability change state”.

As described above, the "normal state" and "latent probability state" are the "no electric support" state in which the electric Chu support function is not added, but the auxiliary hit probability is not zero, and the normal symbol start opening 37 is entered. Then, if it becomes an auxiliary hit, a normal electric open game in which the movable piece 47 (electric chew) of the normal variation winning device 41 operates is generated. However, the probability of lottery per assistance is set to a low probability state (1/200), the operating time (opening time) of the movable piece 47 is very short (opening once for 0.1 seconds), and the right starting port 33 It will be very difficult to win. On the other hand, since the “time saving state” and “probability change state” are the states with “electric power support” to which the electric Chu support function is added, the lottery probability per auxiliary is placed under the high probability state (199/200), and The opening time of the movable piece 47 is long (1.2 seconds 3 times+0.5 seconds 2 times), and the right start opening 33 can be easily won. In the case of the present embodiment, as for the variation time of the normal symbol, the normal time is 1000 ms during the latent state and the latent probability state is 1004 ms during the probability variation state and the time saving state, and the variation time is one kind. .. Of course, the variation time of the normal symbol may be the same or different with or without the electric support. Further, a plurality of types of variation patterns of ordinary symbols having different variation times may be provided.

In the case of the present embodiment, how to hit the player in an advantageous situation changes depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the normal state, "left hitting", in which the game ball is aimed at passing through the leftward flow path 3b, is advantageous, and in the case of the probability changing state, the latent probability state, or the time saving state, the game is played. "Right hitting", in which the ball is aimed so as to pass through the rightward flow path 3c, is advantageous. To facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, the features of each gaming state will be described.

(About normal state)
During the "normal state", "left hitting" is advantageous, so the player advances the game while aiming at the leftward flow path 3b. That is, aiming for a prize in the middle starting opening 34, the game is advanced while receiving the big hit lottery (special symbol variation display game 1) on the special diagram 1 side.

By the way, in the case of this embodiment, there is no small hit in the lottery target type on the special drawing 1 side, and there is a small hit in the lottery target type on the special drawing 2 side (see FIG. 4). The odds of winning a small hit are also about 1/1.14, which is very high (see Figure 4). Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may make a "straight hit" during the normal state to aim for a small hit, and to obtain a prize ball by a small hit game. However, in the normal state, the variation time of the special symbol 1 is 112 seconds at the longest (see the variation pattern type column'RUSH direct hit reach' in FIG. 34), but the variation time of the special symbol 2 is , "Super long fluctuation pattern" which has a very long fluctuation time of 600 seconds (at the time of losing, small hit) is selected (variation pattern type column in FIG. 1-6'). Therefore, even if "right hit" is performed during the normal state and the lower right start opening 35 on the special map 2 side is won, this ultra-long fluctuation pattern (any one of 10 minute fluctuations 1 to 6 other than latent accuracy) ) Is selected, the waiting time until the start of the small hit game becomes very long. In addition, when the player wins the small hit, right after the player confirms the stop display (stop special symbol) of the special map 2 or immediately after confirming the opening operation of the lower special winning opening 50, even if the player hits right Even if the player hits the lower prize hole 50, the lower prize hole 50 is already closed when the game ball reaches the opening door 52b. The prize is not expected to be paid to the lower major prize hole 50. In addition, the lottery target type on the special map 2 side in the normal state does not include a big hit (small hit rush confirmed big hit) type that triggers a transition to the "latent probability state" in which a "small hit rush" described below occurs. Therefore, the act of "right hitting" during the normal state is extremely time-consuming to make a profit, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will be lost to the dark clouds, and the act is useless for the player. It is supposed to be an act that will be effectively defeated.

(During the latent condition: Small hit rush occurs)
On the other hand, in the “latent probability state”, unlike in the normal state, “right hitting” is advantageous, and therefore, the player advances the game while aiming for the rightward flow path 3c. Here, during the latent probability state, the variation time of the special symbol 2 at the time of winning the small hit is a “short variation pattern (high-speed variation pattern)” in which the variation time is 2 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 36). In addition, the small winning percentage on the special map 2 side in the "latent probability state" is won with a very high probability of "about 1/1.14 (see Fig. 4)". Therefore, when the player wins in the lower right starting opening 35, a small hit pattern is selected in almost every game, and a short variation pattern is selected. Open for seconds. Also, during the latent probability state, it is placed under the "no electric support support state" to which the electric chu support function is not added, and the normal electric open game hardly occurs (the probability of assist hitting during the latent state is 1/200). Even if it occurs, the operating time of the movable piece 47 is very short, and it is difficult to win the right start opening 33.

Therefore, in the latent state, the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c of the game board 3 is first picked up by the flow path correction plate 37d and flows down to the left on the flow path correction plate 37d. Then, it passes through the lower end of the flow path correction plate 37d and flows down onto the opening/closing door 42b of the upper special winning opening 40, rolls on the opening/closing door 42 to the right and flows down from the lower end. Most of the game balls that flow down from the opening/closing door 42 are guided to the normal variation winning device 41 side of Den Chu, that is, the right starting opening 33 side by a guide nail (not shown) of the game board, and rarely flow down guide. It is guided in the direction to get on the plate 40d. Of these, the game ball guided to one of the electric Chu side rolls on the movable piece 47 to the lower left without winning the right starting opening 33 because the ordinary electric open game hardly occurs, and the movable piece is moved. It flows down from the lower end of 47 and is guided to either the lower right starting port 35 side or the lower special variation winning device 52 side for small hits. In the case of the present embodiment, approximately 40% of the game balls flowing down from the lower end of the movable piece 47 are guided to the lower right starting opening 35 side, and the remaining 60% are guided to the lower special variation winning device 52 side for small hits. R. That is, most of the game balls that have been launched create a situation in which they are guided to the lower right starting opening 35 for the special symbol variable display game 2 and the lower large winning opening 50 for small hits.

The game ball guided to the lower big winning opening 50 side for a small hit wins the lower big winning opening 50 if the opening door 52b is opened. The game ball guided to the side of the other flow-down guide plate 40d drops toward the lower special winning opening 50 located diagonally lower left, and rarely wins this. On the other hand, the game ball guided to the lower right start opening 35 side does not necessarily win the right lower start opening 35, and the winning rate is about 80%, so that a relatively large number of game balls are on the right. The lower start opening 35 is won.

In this way, in the latent state, because the ordinary electric open game is unlikely to occur, the right-handed game ball is located below it, without being picked up by the electric chu, and the lower right for special map 2. Toward the starting opening 35 and the small special variation winning device 52 for small hits, most of them win one of the winning openings. In addition, the winning rate to the lower right starting opening 35 is also relatively high, and the high-speed fluctuation pattern is selected when the small hit is won, so the execution frequency per unit time of the special symbol fluctuation display game 2 is higher than that of other game states. Get higher For this reason, a small hit game frequently occurs in the latent state, and an average of about 1 to 2 prizes is generated at the lower major winning opening 50 (10 prize balls) each time the small hit is won. It is like this. In other words, in the "potential accuracy state", a "small hit rush" occurs, in which balls are accumulated by the small hitting condominiums, and the longer the latent status continues (the more you get hooked without winning the big hit) Profits of people will increase.

(About time saving state/probability change state)
On the other hand, the “time saving state” and the “probability change state” are placed under the “state with electric power support” to which the electric channel support function is added. In the state with the electric support, the normal electric open game occurs with a high probability, and the opening time of the right starting opening 33 is 0.1 seconds to 3.7 in the state without the electric support (latent state, normal state). Extended to seconds. Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down the right-downward flow path 3c are picked up by the ordinary variable winning device 41 of Den Chu, and the structure is such that almost no prize is won in the lower right starting port 35. Of course, not all of the game balls are necessarily picked up by the electric chu and win the right starting port 33 for special FIG. 1, and the game ball that spilled without winning the right starting port 33 is the one on the downstream side. The lower right start opening 35 for FIG. 2 may be won.

Therefore, during the time saving state or the probability variation state, with respect to the symbol variation display game, the occurrence of the symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side becomes dominant, and the symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side hardly occurs, and the latent state The situation is the opposite of. Further, even if the special symbol variation display game 2 is executed, at the time of winning the small hit in the time-saving state or the probability variation state, any one of “10 minutes variation during non-latent probability variation 1 to 6” which is a super long variation pattern. The variation pattern (variation time of 600 seconds)” is selected (see FIG. 36), so that a situation in which the small hit game itself is unlikely to occur for a long time is created, although the small hit is won with a high probability. Therefore, it becomes difficult to win a prize at the lower major winning opening 50, and the above-described "small hit rush" that frequently occurs in a small hit game does not occur.

As described above, in the time saving state and the probability changing state, it is easy to make the right starting opening 33 of the special opening 1 side starting opening win the prize by the electric Chu support function, but since the small hit rush described above is not involved, in terms of the payout performance, The advantage to the player is overwhelmingly lower than the latent state. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the probability of transition to the latent probability state under the time saving state or the probability changing state, that is, the “small hit rush” transition rate is also 50% on the special figure 2 side (see big hit 5 in FIG. 4), and the special figure 1 On the side, it is 15% (see jackpots 1 and 2 in FIG. 4). In this respect as well, the advantage to the player is inferior to that of the latent probability state in which the big hit lottery on the special map 2 side is frequently received. In this respect, it is decisively different from a general pachinko gaming machine in which a profitable state is increased if there is a power saving state such as a time saving state or a probability changing state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the above "small hit lash" is generated in the latent probability state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the configuration of the prizes and various winning devices (41, 42, 51, etc.) arranged on the game board, the hit type, the auxiliary hit type, the hit game mode, the normal electric open game mode, etc. A small hit lash may be generated under the time-saving state (and under a game state accompanied by a state with electric power support).

(Normal state → big hit game)
With reference to FIG. 6, the line L1 is a case where the jackpot lottery probability 1/320 is won in the special symbol variable display game 1 in the “normal state”. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 38a, a big hit game according to the winning type is executed by using the upper special variation winning device 42 for big hit. As shown in FIG. 4, there are 1 to 4 big hits in the winning type of the special figure 1, and the selection probability (lottery probability) of the “design lottery” is 10/200 (5%) and 20/200 ( 10%), 100/200 (50%), and 70/200 (35%). Of these, when "big hit 1" which is a trigger to shift to the latent state is selected (line L2), "big bonus (small hit rush determination big hit game)" is started. On the other hand, when the big hits 2 to 4 are selected (line L3), the "first battle bonus (small hit rush undetermined big hit game)" is started.

In the big bonus, a special blessing effect is displayed as a winning effect to celebrate the latent state, that is, the confirmation of the shift to the “small hit rush”. On the other hand, in the first battle bonus, as the hitting effect, a story-like effect having a story-like effect such as so-called "battle effect" is revealed, in which the big hit type selected this time is kept secret. Here, the battle production that expresses the battle between the hero and the alien appears. In this battle effect, in each round in-game effect of the 1st to 7th rounds, a battle effect that gives an inferring factor of whether the jackpot type is a big hit 2 to 4 is developed, and during the 7th round game of the round, As a result production of the battle production, the jackpot type that has been won this time is definitely notified, that is, whether the transition to the probability variation state or the time saving state, and whether the maximum number of rounds is 16R or 8R. Be informed.

The game state after the jackpot game is determined according to the jackpot type that has been won this time, as described above (see FIG. 4). In this regard, the line L4 shown in the figure is a route that is shifted to the "latent probability state" after the jackpot game with the jackpot 1 (normal latent probability jackpot) is completed, and the line L5 is a jackpot 2, 3 (normal probability variation jackpot). After the big hit game is over, the route is shifted to the "probability variation state", and the line L6 shows the route for shifting to the "time saving state" after the big hit game with the big hit 4 (normal time shortening big hit).

(Latent probability state → small hit game → latent state)
During the latent probability state, the "small hit rush" that loops the small hit game as shown in line L7→line L8 may occur. This small hit rush will continue as long as you continue to win the 1/1.14 small hit without winning the 1/137 big hit. In the small hitting game, the lower big winning opening 50 for small hits is opened for 1.2 seconds, and the game ball that has reached without being guided to the lower right starting opening 35 side reaches the lower big winning opening 50 being opened. Win a prize. In addition, even if you win the small hit, there is no transition of the internal game state (small hit is a hit that does not trigger the transition of the internal game state), and when the small hit game ends, it returns to the original "latent probability state" ( Line L8), "Small hit rush" is possible, and the number of balls to be acquired is increased by the small hit consort so that a large number of prize balls can be acquired in a short time.

In this way, in the latent state, the player aims to win the right lower start opening 35 for special map 2 by hitting the right, and expects a small hitting condominium (small hit rush) to proceed with the game. I will let you. Also, during the latent probability state, it will be continued unless you win the big hit 4,8 for the latent accuracy short time jackpot or the big hit 3,6,7 for the latent accuracy probability variation big hit (big jackpot that triggers the transition to the time saving situation or the probability variation state). R. The player does not win these jackpots and the current latent probability state continues, or even when the jackpot is won, the latent probability latent hit jackpot (big hit The game proceeds while expecting to win 1, 2, 5) (line L17).

If the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed before the special symbol variable display game 2 is executed, the small hit rush ends unless the special symbol 1 side is lost. This is, when the special figure 1 is a big hit (in the case of a big hit variation), in the big hit lottery of the special figure 2, all big hits are excluded from the symbol lottery target, and the small hit is won or lost (Fig. 18). (See Steps S413 and S414 of FIG. 21 and Steps S431 and S432 of FIG. 21), the small hit rush will continue, but when the big hit fluctuation on the special figure 1 side ends, the special figure 2 side is forced to " While being stopped by "missing symbol" (see steps S485 to S489 in FIG. 24), the jackpot game won on the special figure 1 side is started, and execution of the variable display operation on the special figure 2 side is prohibited. is there. Therefore, for the hit variation pattern of Toku-zu 1 during the latent probability state, as shown in FIG. 34, "variation per 4 minutes during latency (variation time 240 seconds)" is selected for all big hits, so the variation ends. A maximum of 4 minutes until you hit is a chance period for a small hit rush. However, even in such a case, if the big hits 1 and 2 (latent probability big hits at the time of latent probability) are won, the state is shifted to the latent probability state again (the small hit rush of FIGS. 4 and 6). (Refer to the broken line frame), substantially, the small hit rush will be continued.

(Probability change state → small hit game, loss → probability change state)
During the probability change state, as described above, most of the game balls heading to the lower-side special winning opening 50 on the downstream side are picked up by the electric chu, so that the lower-most large winning opening 50 hardly receives a prize. In addition, at the time of the small hit of the special figure 2, the "ultra long variation pattern (600 seconds)" is selected, and the small hit game is difficult to occur. Therefore, the “small hit rush” does not occur (line L10, line L11). In the case of the present embodiment, in the “probably changed state”, winnings to the right starting port 33 occur frequently, but the number of prize balls is 1, that is, even if winning to the right starting port 33, the net additional number is 0. In addition, since the small hit game is difficult to occur and the winning of the lower large winning opening 50 is hardly generated, the number of balls output does not increase, and basically the player's ball is slightly reduced or the current state is maintained. While the game progresses (the base value of the Den Chu prize in the state with electric support is 100% or less). In addition, during the probability variation state, the jackpot is substantially continued until the next big win (ST specified number of 65535 times), and the player expects that the big hit in the probability variation state is a big hit that triggers the transition to the latent probability state. However, you will enjoy playing games.

(Time saving state → small hit game, loss → time saving state)
Even in the "time saving state", it is put under a game situation of the same phenomenon as the probability variation state (almost no winning in the lower big winning opening 50, "super long fluctuation pattern" is selected at the time of small hit of special figure 2), small No hit lash occurs (line L13, line L14). In addition, since the time saving state ends in 7 or 50 times of saving time and shifts to the normal state (lines L15 and L20), the player has a big hit when the big hit in the time saving state is a trigger to shift to the latent probability state. You will enjoy playing games while expecting to be.

(Big hit in the latent state, the probable variation state, or the time saving state)
When the big hit is won in the latent probability state, the probability changing state, or the time saving state (lines L9, L12, L16), the mid-hit effect and the big hit game according to the big hit type are started. In the figure, as an example thereof, an example is shown in which a "second battle bonus" is started as a big hit game in a state of continuous play. In the second battle bonus, like the first battle bonus, a "battle effect" that conceals the jackpot type that has been won this time is revealed. However, the battle effect of the second battle bonus is different from the battle effect of the first battle bonus. Here, no matter which jackpot is won, the battle effect is developed, and the jackpot type won this time is definitely notified as the result effect of the battle effect from the round game of the (final round) to the ending effect. That is, which of the latent state, the probable state and the time saving state is to be notified. Specifically, in the case of "big hit 1, 2, 5" that triggers the transition to the latent probability state, a blessing effect that notifies the small hit rush rush (shift to the latent probability state) appears, and "big hit 3, In the case of "6, 7", a chance effect that informs the sudden change rush (transition to the sudden change state) appears, and in the case of "big hit 4, 8", a challenge effect that informs the short time rush (shift to the short time state), respectively. Appeared as a result production of the battle production. After the big hit game, according to the big hit type that has been won this time, a predetermined game state is entered (lines L17 to L19).

(Time saving state → normal state)
By the way, when returning to the normal state after finishing the time saving state, it is considered that the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol 2 (special figure 2 operation holding ball) is often present.

During the time saving state, a prize is frequently generated in the right starting opening 33 due to the action of the electric power support function. For this reason, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 operation-reserving sphere will be present when the time saving is completed. In addition, there is a possibility that the game ball spilled without winning the right start opening 33 for the special figure 1 may enter the lower right start opening 35 for the special figure 2 on the downstream side, and win the lower right start opening 35. Then, the fluctuation on the side of Toku-zu 2 is also started. As for the fluctuation on the Toku-zu 2 side during the time saving state, an ultra-long fluctuation pattern of 600 seconds is selected at the time of losing and small hits (see "Normal/probable variation/time saving" column in Fig. 36, except "Latency"). Medium 10-minute fluctuation 1 to 6") It takes a very long time until one Toku-zu 2 operation-holding sphere is digested, and therefore, there is also Toku-zu 2 operation-retaining sphere at the time of short-time digestion, or It is highly possible that Toku-zu 2 is changing.

When the game goes out of the time-saving state and shifts to the normal state under such a game situation, the special effect is on the special map 1 side as in the time-saving state, and on the other special figure 2 side. It is in the “back fluctuation state” (see FIG. 7B and FIG. 31E). If the special figure 2 operation holding balls are accumulated up to 4 when the time saving state is exited and there is a big hit winning hold among them, the variation pattern according to special figure 2 in the normal state is: In order to prevent capture hits, a 600-second ultra-long variation pattern (10 minutes variation other than latent accuracy variation 1 to 6) is selected at the time of losing and small hits, and even if it is a big hit, a 240-second long variation pattern (usually (Variation per 4 minutes) is selected (see the normal column in FIG. 36 and the normal column in FIG. 34). If the jackpot win hold is the second hold, the waiting time (until the fluctuation display of the second jackpot win hold stops) is excluded, except for the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 2 that is currently in process. It takes about 10 minutes (1 operation hold ball fluctuation time 10 minutes + fluctuation time of jackpot winning hold 4 minutes), and if the jackpot winning hold is the 4th hold, the waiting time will be longer, about 34 minutes It also takes about 30 minutes for changing the three operation holding balls + 4 minutes for changing the jackpot winning hold.

Therefore, many players quit the game without realizing that the special map 2 is changing. Of course, even if the player quits the game, the special figure 2 is changed as it is, so if the symbol variation display game (big figure variation of special figure 2) related to the jackpot winning suspension is finished, a big hit occurs. Then (condition device operation flag ON described later), after that, until the game ball passes the winning combination gate 57, the substantial jackpot game (round game) is not started, and it is placed under the "round game start waiting state". Get burned. In such a situation, if no countermeasure is taken and the special map 2 informs that a big hit has occurred in the dark cloud under the back fluctuation condition, the following problem occurs.

Even if no one is playing the game, the data counter DT starts the big hit notification (the big hit notification function), and gives the surrounding players a feeling of distrust or discomfort. In addition, although the data counter DT is making a big hit notification, there is a risk that a player who has confirmed that no one is present at the gaming table may be prone to hyena acts such as securing that table. May cause trouble between players. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is preferable not to execute the big hit notification by the data counter DT at least until the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57.

(At the time of first hit: when the big hit in the normal state is won)
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "big hit signal", which is an outer end signal indicating that the big hit game is being performed, is output from the frame external terminal board 21 at the timing described below. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 32A is a time chart showing the output timing of the big hit signal when the big hit is won in the normal state.

The "big hit signal" is output when the special figure stops with a big hit pattern and after the condition device is activated (after the condition device operation flag is ON), the accessory continuous operation device is activated (effect product continuous operation device operation flag is ON). To be done. The condition device operation flag is a flag that specifies whether or not a big hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the ON state (=5 AH), it indicates that the big hit game is in progress, and the flag is in the OFF state ( = 00H) indicates that the big hit game is not in progress. In addition, the "feature continuous operation device operating flag" is a flag for designating the operating state of the accessory continuous operation device, and when the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), the accessory continuous operation device. It indicates that the operation is in progress (the round game can be continued), and if the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is not in operation (the round game cannot be continued). The accessory continuous operation device operation flag is set to an ON state when the combination gate sensor 57a detects a game ball in a special electric accessory management process (step S095 in FIG. 13) described later, and the jackpot game ends. Sometimes it is set to the OFF state.

For details, referring to FIG. 32(A), the main control unit 20 displays a special symbol (here, special figure 1) related to the big hit in a stopped state and a predetermined fixed display time (time t0 to time t1) elapses. In this case, a big hit occurs (after time t1 (after the condition device operation flag is ON)), the big hit signal is not output until the game ball is detected by the winning combination gate sensor 57a, and the winning combination gate sensor 57a plays the game. When the ball is detected (when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned ON), a big hit signal is output (time ta). Then, although not shown, the output is stopped when the jackpot game is over (when the round game for the specified number of rounds is over). The "fixed display time" is a margin time period for notifying the stop display mode of the special symbol after the variation time of the special symbol ends, and when the fixed display time elapses, the next process is performed. Transfer is possible (see step S482 of FIG. 24, step S492 of FIG. 25, and steps S502 and S508 of FIG. 26, which will be described later).

Here, in the present embodiment, even if the winning combination gate sensor 57a detects a game ball before a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after a big hit occurs, the detection signal is treated as invalid. “Detection invalid period (time t1 to t2)” is provided. This detection invalid period (role combination gate effective waiting time) is used as an effect time width for causing the "right-handing instruction effect 135 (see FIG. 31A described later)" to appear as a part of the hit effect. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57 in the detection invalid period, the round game is not started and the big hit signal is not output (see time te).

However, after the detection invalidation period (role combination gate valid waiting time) has elapsed (after time t2), the detection of the game ball by the role combination gate sensor 57a is validated (see "role combination gate" in the figure). Therefore, during this effective period, when the combination gate sensor 57a detects a game ball, a big hit signal is output (time ta), and after a predetermined interval time (for example, 20 ms) elapses, a round game is played. It is set to start (time tb).

Thereby, at the time of the first hit, it is possible to prevent the big hit notification by the data counter DT from being executed at least until the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57. In particular, it is possible to prevent a sudden big hit notification from being executed by the data counter DT when the special figure 2 side is in the back fluctuation state. In addition, at the time of the first hit, the fluctuation reduction signal is not output, and the data counter DT determines that the “variation shortening signal” output to the time saving state, the probability variation state, or the latent probability state is not received, and thus the signal during the big hit is large. Even if it receives, it can be determined that the big hit this time is not the big hit in the condominium but the first big hit.

(At the time of consecutive holidays (at the time of big hit in the latent state, the shortened state, or the changed state))
In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the "big hit mid-range signal", the above-mentioned "variable short-time big hit mid-range signal" of the outer end signal indicating that the big hit game is being output from the frame external terminal board 21. For "medium signal", the special symbol time saving function is operating (while the special symbol time saving state flag is ON) during the big hit game (when the condition device operation flag is ON). In other words, the short-time big hit big signal is output at the start of the big hit which is won in the latent probability state, the time shortening state, or the probability change state.

FIG. 32(B) is a time chart showing an output timing of a variable short-time big hit signal when a big hit is won in the latent probability state as an example of a game state during special symbol time-shortening function operation. Note that the description of the same content as in FIG. 32A is omitted as appropriate to avoid redundant description.

The above-mentioned "signal during big hit at the time of variation" is output while the condition device is in operation (condition device operation flag is ON), and is output while the accessory continuous operation device is in operation (access part continuous operation device operation flag is ON). 32(B), the main control unit 20 stops the special symbol (here, special figure 2) related to the big hit, and the timing when the big hit occurs at time t1 (condition device operation flag ON). At the time), it outputs a signal during a big short hit. Then, similarly to the big hit signal, the output is stopped when the round game of the maximum number of rounds is completed (not shown).

Then, the data counter DT starts the big hit notification when it receives the big hit medium signal or the short hit big hit medium signal. That is, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the case of “first time hit (big hit in normal state)” and “during continuous vacation (in the case of the present embodiment, in the probability changing state, latent probability state, or time saving state) It is possible to make the start timing of the big hit notification by the data counter DT different from that in the case of “big hit winning”). Specifically, during the extended game, before the first hit, during the big hit game, in other words, the outer end signal that can specify that the condition device is operating is output.

More specifically, when a big hit occurs, during the initial hit (big hit in the normal state), the short hit big hit signal is not output (see FIG. 32(A)), but the above big hit signal is output. Since only the data is output, the data counter DT side receives the signal during the big hit and starts the big hit notification. Therefore, on the data counter DT side, the big hit notification is not started only when the big hit occurs on the gaming machine 1 side, but the big hit notification is started after the game ball has passed to the winning combination gate 57. On the other hand, at the time of continuous play (a big hit other than during the normal state), the "between short hit big hit signal" is output prior to the big hit middle hit signal. In response to this, before the game ball passes to the winning combination gate 57, that is, when the big hit on the gaming machine 1 side starts, the big hit notification is started. While passing the winning combination gate 57, the signal during big hit is output, but since the data counter DT side has already received the signal during big hit during variable length and has started the big hit notification, the big hit due to the signal during big hit. No notification is performed.

In this way, the start timing of the big hit notification by the data counter DT is made different in the case of the first hit and in the case of the condominium, in the case of the first hit, the player is distrusted, etc. From the viewpoint of preventing the above-mentioned problem, it is necessary to start the big hit notification by the data counter DT at the time of passing the winning combination gate (when the accessory linkage operation device is ON). It is extremely rare to quit the game, and when the big hit occurs (timing of the condition device operation flag ON), there is no problem even if the big hit notification is started immediately, and this is done at the time of the big hit occurrence. This is because it is preferable to properly notify (see FIGS. 31A to 31G described later).

In the case of the data counter DT capable of discriminating between the initial hit time and the extended game time based on the fluctuation shortening signal and the big hit mid-range signal, the variable short time big hit mid-range signal may not be output. Specifically, on the data counter DT side, when a fluctuation shortening signal is received (ON edge detection), the current gaming state is a gaming state accompanied by the operation of the special figure time saving function (in the case of the present embodiment, the time saving state, the probability changing state, (Or latent condition). On the other hand, on the gaming machine side, if a big hit occurs during the game state accompanied by the operation of the special time saving function, the output of the fluctuation shortening signal is stopped (the time saving function does not operate during the big hit) and immediately after that the big hit. The medium signal is output (see the broken line portion of the big hit medium signal in FIG. 32(B)). Utilizing such an output form, on the data counter DT side, after receiving the special symbol determination signal during the game state involving the operation of the special symbol time saving function, the OFF edge of the current special symbol fluctuation shortening signal is detected. At the same time, when the ON edge of the signal during the big hit is detected, it can be determined that the big hit occurs during the continuous vacation. Of course, as long as it is a configuration that can output any of the signal during mid-big hit during a short change, the signal during mid-hit, and the variation shortening signal, it can correspond to the above-mentioned data counter and also corresponds to various data counters DT. A possible gaming machine can be provided.

Although details will be described later, when the big hit this time in the normal state is the big hit on the special figure 1 side (big hit 1 to 4) and the big hit on the special figure 2 side, the big hit on the gaming machine 1 side is started. The effect (big hit start effect (opening effect)) is different (see FIGS. 31A to 31G described later). In other words, the big hit of this time is the big hit on the special map 1 side (special figure 1 big hit) under the special figure 1 table fluctuation state (special figure 2 back fluctuation state) and the big hit of this time is the special figure 1 table. The big hit start effect is different from that in the case of the big hit on the special figure 2 side (special big figure 2 back big hit) under the changing state (special figure 2 back changing state). As a result, by taking measures against the hitting effect, it is possible to effectively prevent a sense of discomfort from being given to the surroundings and also to effectively prevent hyena action.

(Specific examples of effects on the gaming machine 1 side and the data counter DT side: FIGS. 31A to 31G)
31A to 31G show an example of effects on the gaming machine 1 side and an example of effects on the data counter DT side depending on the game situation. In FIG. 31A to FIG. 31G, mainly as an effect mode on the gaming machine 1 side, an image display effect by the liquid crystal display device 36 and a light effect effect by the decoration lamp 45 (around LED 45) are shown.

In the present embodiment, as already described, in any one of the normal state, the probability changing state, and the time saving state, the main effect of the symbol variable display game 1 according to Toku-zu 1 (Variation state of Toku-zu 1 table) To appear as. Further, in the case of the latent probability state, the symbol variation display game 2 according to Toku-zu 2 is revealed as the main effect (Toku-zu 2 table variation state). Therefore, depending on what kind of gaming state and what kind of big hit is won, the effect during the big hit game (hit effect) may be different.

(Specific example at the time of first hit: FIGS. 31A and 31B)
31A to 31B, the transition of the effect contents (the effect contents of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 and the decoration lamp 45) on the gaming machine 1 side at the time of the first hit, and the effect contents of the data counter DT at the time of the big hit (DT side) Shows the transition of the jackpot notification mode). 31A to 31B, in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, in the situation where the number of the special figure 1 operation holding balls is 3 and the number of the special figure 2 operation holding balls is zero, the special figure 1 Wins a big hit in the pattern variation display game 1 on the side, and the big hit is the first big hit after the opening of the hall (here, at the 634th rotation from the opening, the big hit 1 (small hit rush transition normal time latent probability big hit ) Is assumed to have been elected). That is, the big hit this time is the case of the big hit on the special figure 1 side (special figure 1 big hit) under the special figure 1 front fluctuation state (special figure 2 back fluctuation state).

FIG. 31A(1) shows an example of an effect at the time of first hit. With reference to FIG. 31A(1), in the liquid crystal screen, the symbol variable display game 1 according to Toku-zu 1 is displayed as the main effect (effect under the normal effect mode) (Toku-zu 1 table change state, 2 back fluctuation state), in the lower left corner thereof, as a sub effect (sub display area) different from the main effect, a dedicated display area 160 for the number of special symbols 1 and 2 and the presence or absence of variable display, It is shown by four small squares. Note that the dedicated display area 160 is exaggerated in the figure, and the actual screen occupancy of the dedicated display area 160 is lower than that in the figure. Further, the receiving seat J and the game execution hold K in the changing display area 78 are omitted.

Among the four squares related to the dedicated display area 160, the upper left square is the first reserved number display area 156 for displaying the special figure 1 operation reserved number of balls, and the upper right square is displaying the special figure 1 in a variable display. It is a first variation presence/absence display area 157 that displays whether or not Further, the lower left square is a second reserved number display area 158 for displaying the special figure 2 operation reserved number of balls, and the lower right square is the second reserved number display area 158 for displaying whether or not the special figure 2 is being variably displayed. A change presence/absence display area 159 is provided. In the first reserved quantity display area 156 and the second reserved quantity display area 158, the reserved quantity is indicated by Arabic numerals, and in the first variation presence/absence display area 157 and the second variation presence/absence display area 159, it is indicated that the symbol is changing. ", and that the symbol is stopped is indicated by "X". In FIG. 31A(1), the special figure 1 number of operation reserved balls is “3”, the special figure 1 is in a changing state “⇔”, the special figure 2 is number of operation holding balls is “0”, and the special figure 2 is a non-changing state “X” It has become. Regarding the display of the first variation presence/absence display area 157 and the second variation presence/absence display area 159, “X” indicates a lost symbol, “Δ” indicates a small hit symbol, and “◯” indicates a stop display state in a large hit symbol. .. Therefore, when any of these “X”, “Δ”, and “◯” is displayed, it indicates that the special symbol is in a non-fluctuation state.

The images displayed in the first variation presence/absence display area 157 and the second variation presence/absence display area 159 indicate whether or not the variation display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is being performed, and therefore, they are different from the three decorative patterns. As the fourth symbol of, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is referred to as the “fourth symbol”, and in some cases, the fourth symbol on the special symbol 1 side is the “decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol” or the “fourth symbol 157”. ], the fourth symbol on the special figure 2 side is also referred to as "decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol" or "fourth symbol 159". Note that the dedicated display area 160 has four display areas 156 to 159 regardless of whether the special figure 1 front side variation state, the special figure 1 back side variation state, the special figure 2 front side variation state, or the special figure 2 rear side variation state. The contents of are displayed.

In FIG. 31A(1), when the big hit variation (symbol fluctuation display game 1) of the special figure 1 this time ends, the combination of the decorative symbols (decorative symbol 131) related to the type of the big hit stops. Here, in the symbol variation display game 1 on the special drawing 1 side, which is the main effect, "777 (small hit rush rush confirmed symbol)" indicating the win of "big hit 1 (normal latent latent big hit)" is stopped An example is shown. However, in the figure, the stage of the variable display of the special figure 1 immediately before the fixed display is shown, and "777" of the decorative pattern 131 is the temporary stop display state (swing fluctuation) immediately before the fixed display. The display content of the special display area 160 of the sub effect is that the special figure 1 operation-reserving ball number "3", the special figure 1 (fourth pattern 157) is in the changing state "⇔", and the special figure 2 operation-retaining ball number "0". The individual, the special figure 2 (the fourth symbol 159) is in the non-variable state (missing symbol stop display state) “X”.

After that, the fluctuation of special figure 1 ends (after the fixed display time elapses), and a big hit occurs. As a result, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31A (2) is that the special figure 1 operation reserve ball number "3", the special figure 1 (fourth symbol 157) is in a non-variable state (big hit symbol stopped state) " ◯”, special figure 2 operation holding ball number “0”, special figure 2 (fourth symbol 159) becomes non-fluctuation state (missing symbol stop state) “X”. Since the special symbol variation display game (variation of special symbols) is not executed during the big hit game, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 does not change until the big hit game ends.

FIG. 31A (2) shows the game machine side 1 (the liquid crystal screen, the decoration lamp 45) at the start of the big hit game, and the effect situation on the data counter DT side.

On the gaming machine side 1, as a part of the hit effect, a big hit start effect 132 is displayed in which a large "big hit" message is displayed in the center of the screen and the decoration lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45) is illuminated in rainbow color. Along with the big hit start effect 132, a right-hand hitting instruction effect 135 for instructing “right hit” appears. The big hit start effect 132 and the right-handing instruction effect 135 are displayed until the “combination gate effective waiting time (for example, 5 seconds)” until the combination gate sensor 57a is activated. In addition, “777” of the decorative design (decorative stop design) 131 is displayed in a small escape in the upper left corner, and the combination of decorative designs that the big hit this time has stopped is displayed. In addition, as the winning effect, an effect corresponding to the game state at the time of winning and the hit type is displayed.

At this stage, the big hit signal is not output (see time t1 in FIG. 32(A)), and as shown in FIG. 2(2), the big hit notification by the data counter DT side is not executed (in the figure, the light emitting unit DTa). Normally lights up), and the display content of the data counter DT is not updated. Therefore, in the display content of the data counter DT in FIG. 31A(2), the display value of the big hit count display portion DTd (hereinafter abbreviated as “big hit count DTd”) is zero, and the display value of the start count display portion DTb (hereinafter “start count DTb”). Is abbreviated as “”, the display value of the total rotation speed display portion DTc (hereinafter abbreviated as “total rotation speed DTb”) is “634”, and the display value of the number of consecutive holidays display portion DTe (hereinafter “number of consecutive holidays DTe”). It is zero).

Then, when the winning combination gate effective waiting time (5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 31B (3), a gate for instructing to aim at the winning combination gate 57 (to let the winning combination gate 57 pass the game ball). The winning instruction effect 137 appears. As the gate winning instruction effect 137, a message "Aim at the gate!" and an arrow image appear here.

(Right-handed instruction production 135 → Appearance of gate winning instruction production 137)
Here, in the present embodiment, at the start of the big hit, instead of simply instructing to aim at the winning combination gate 57, first, a right-handing instruction is given in advance and then an instruction to aim at the winning combination gate 57 is given. (The right winning instruction effect 135 is displayed, and then the gate winning instruction effect 137 is displayed). The reason will be described below.

If a command is given to aim at the winning combination gate 57 immediately after the big hit is started, in the case of a game beginner, the player does not know where the winning combination gate 57 is, and hits left or right. It is also assumed that a player may hit a game ball appropriately without knowing whether or not. In the case of the present embodiment, since the winning combination gate 57 is formed on the rightward flow path 3c side, if the player hits left, the profit of the player is lost. In view of such a situation, in the present embodiment, first, after a right-handing instruction is given in advance (a right-handing instruction effect 135 appears for a predetermined time), an instruction to aim at the winning combination gate 57 is given (gate winning instruction effect). 137), such as "Kind instruction production" appears.

When the player passes the game ball through the winning combination gate 57 in accordance with the gate winning instruction effect 137, the accessory continuous operation device is activated (the accessory continuous operation device flag is ON), and the frame external terminal board 21 is also operated. Outputs a signal during a big hit (see time ta in FIG. 32A). Then, after a lapse of a predetermined interval time (for example, 20 ms), the first round game (opening the special winning opening 40 for big hit) is started (see time tb in FIG. 32(A)).

FIG. 31B(4) shows the effect situation on the gaming machine 1 side and the data counter DT side when the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57. On the gaming machine 1 side, the in-round effect 139 is started upon the start of the round game. In the mid-round production 139, in addition to displaying animated images of aliens descending from the disk and displaying a message “Aim for an upper attacker” to instruct the top jackpot 40 for big hits, the current number of rounds and acquisition The notification effect 130 or the like that displays the number of balls appears.

On the side of the data counter DT, upon receiving the signal during the big hit, the light emitting section DTa is caused to emit light of iridescent or the like to start its own big hit notification and update the display contents of the data counter. With regard to the display content of the data counter, since the big hit count DTd is the first hit, it is updated to a value obtained by adding 1 to the big hit this time (the number of big hits is 1 and the number of consecutive games resulting from the big hit is 0). Although not shown, when the big hit game of this time is over, the big hit signal is turned off, and the data counter DT returns the value of the start count DTb to zero assuming that the big hit is over.

(Example of performance during small hit rush (during the latent state): Fig. 31C)
After the big hit game by the big hit 1 described in FIG. 31C is finished, the player enters a latent probability state (see FIG. 4). FIG. 31C(5) shows an ending effect relating to the big hit 1 (normal latent accuracy big hit), and FIGS. 31C and 31D(6) to (8) show effect examples in the latent accuracy state.

The ending effect is an effect content for informing information about a game state to be transferred after the big hit ends, and an ending effect corresponding to the big hit type is displayed. In this example, since the case of winning the big hit 1 has been described, the ending effect 175 has effect contents for informing that the latent state (small hit rush) will be entered. In FIG. 31C(5), an image of an alien and a message of "Alian Abduction Rush" indicating that the player enters a latent state (small hit rush) are included.

When the big hit game with the big hit 1 ends and the ending effect 175 ends, the game state shifts to the latent probability state. In the latent probability state, the special figure 2 front and back variation state (special figure 1 back variation state) is brought about, and the main effect of the symbol variation display game 2 according to special figure 2 (substantial probability production mode (small hit rush production mode)) ) Is displayed.

FIG. 31C (6) shows an example of an effect when a game ball wins the lower big winning opening 50 for a small hit in the small hit game in the latent accuracy effect mode (small hit rush effect mode).

The increase effect 180 shown in FIG. 31C (6) informs (displays) the number of acquired balls (10 prize balls of the lower special winning opening 50) added to the number of balls acquired each time the lower large winning opening 50 is won. At the same time, the content of the effect is to notify the cumulative value of the current number of balls acquired in real time. In addition, as the current number of balls to be acquired, the total number of balls to be acquired from the time of the first hit until the end of the condominium (shift to the normal state) is displayed in real time (see FIG. 31E (12) described later). ..

This increase effect 180 displays the number of acquired balls notification effect 177 for notifying the current number of acquired balls (approximate value), and the number of acquired balls to be added to the current number of acquired balls each time the player wins the lower special winning opening 50. The added number of balls notification effect 178, an abduction effect 179 in which the number of winnings is notified by a character image, and the like are included. In addition, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31C (6), the special figure 1 operation reserve ball number "2", the special figure 1 (fourth symbol 157) is the changing state "⇔", special figure 2 operation reserve The number of balls is "4", and the special figure 2 (fourth symbol 159) is in a non-variable state (small hit symbol stop display mode) "Δ".

The production example of FIG. 31C (6) shows a case where two game balls successively win while the lower major winning opening 50 is opened by the small hit game. When a prize is generated while the lower major winning opening 50 is open, a number image of “+10” is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal screen by the added ball number notification effect 178, and when this number image is displayed, The count value (current number of acquired balls) of the acquired ball number notification effect 177 is updated and displayed. Since the current count value is “Total 2180” (the number of balls acquired is 2180), the count value increases by “+10” in the order of “Total 2190”→“Total 2200”. In addition, in the abduction effect 179, one cow image 179a is displayed for each winning prize, and an effect image expressing that it is taken away to the disk is displayed.

31C (7) and the increase effect 180 shown in FIG. 31C (6), the number image of "+10" by the added sphere number notification effect 178 is changed to a number image (emphasized number image 176) which is framed in a predetermined color. The point is that, in addition to the cow image 179a, the girl character image 179b is displayed in the abduction effect 179.

The emphasized number image 176 is one mode of the prefetching notice effect, and is an effect mode that suggests the expected degree of winning within the hold of whether or not the big hit winning hold exists in the existing operation holding balls. The emphasized number image (additional ball number notification effect) 176 indicates a high or low expectation of winning in the hold due to the difference in the edging color. For example, look-ahead of the "acquired sphere number display system" such as normal white (numeral image in FIG. 31C (6)), special notice color such as green, red, iridescent color or a color pattern of notice pattern It can be a notice production. Here, the green, red, and rainbow-colored edging colors indicate that there is a high expectation of winning within the hold in this order of color, and in particular, the rainbow-colored edging indicates that there is a jackpot winning hold within the hold. Is definitely shown (probability within hold). It should be noted that the display mode of the number image may be changed to indicate the degree of expectation of winning on hold. For example, provide a numerical image represented by Arabic numerals (“+10”), Chinese numerals (“+ten”), Roman numerals (“+X”), etc., and in this order, suggest that the expectation of winning within the hold is high. You can

In addition, the character image 179b is also one mode of the prefetching notice effect, and indicates the "winning type expectation level" of what kind of winning type when there is an on-hold winning hold, for example, in FIG. 31C (7). The illustrated girl character image 179b is a notice image (specific expectation high expectation look-ahead notice effect) that suggests that the expectation of the latent probability big hit (big hit 5), which is a continuation of the small hit rush, is high. In the present embodiment, in addition to the character images 179a and 179b, a plurality of types of character images are prepared, and an expectation of a latent accuracy latent probability jackpot (big hit 5) is expected depending on what kind of character image appears. Degree of accuracy, probability of probability variation big hit (big hit 6, 7), expectation degree of short latency big hit (big hit 8). Specifically, in the case of the cow image 179a, the latent time reduction big hit (big hit 8) has a relatively higher expectation than other big hits, and in the case of a boy character image (not shown), the latent probability The probability of time-variant big jackpot (big jackpot 6, 7) is relatively higher than that of other jackpots. In the case of the character image 179b of a girl, the latent time latent probability jackpot (big jackpot 5) is more relative than other jackpots. It is designed to notify that the degree of expectation is high (accurate). The appearance rates of the various character images described above may be different from each other or may be the same, and can be appropriately determined. However, it is preferable that the character image of the girl is positioned as a premium effect that is a small hit rush continuation notification, and that the appearance rate thereof is relatively lower than that of other character images.

In the case of the present embodiment, whether or not there is a big hit winning hold among the existing operation holding balls, if the big hit winning hold exists, based on the highlighted numeral image 176 and the character image displayed in the abduction effect 179. It is possible to give an inferring factor as to what kind of winning type it is by the effect of the system for displaying the number of acquired balls during the small hit rush. As a result, the effects during the small hit rush can be varied and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Variation of the production during the small hit rush)
In the added sphere number notification effects 176 and 178 of FIGS. 31C (6) and (7), the number image of “+10” is displayed each time there is a winning prize, but the following display mode can be adopted. For example, when there is a prize at the lower big prize hole 50 during one small hit game, "+10" is displayed for the first prize, and "+20" is displayed for the second prize. In the case of the third prize, "+30" may be displayed, and in the case of the fourth prize, "+40" may be displayed (cumulative display type added ball number notification effect). Then, the final value (here, +40) is added to the current value of the acquired ball number notification effect 177 to update the acquired ball number.

Further, the effect content of the added ball number notification effect may be changed according to the current number of acquired balls. For example, if the current number of balls to be acquired (total number of balls to be acquired) is 10,000 or less, the cumulative display type additional balls number notification effect of the above-described modification is adopted, and if the number of balls exceeds 10,000, the above-mentioned FIG. 31C (6) ( 7) The additional ball number notification effect is used.

Further, the increase effect 180 (at least one effect of 176 to 179) may be used to notify (indicate) the lottery result on the back variation side. For example, when the special map 1 on the back fluctuation side is in the big hit winning state (the big hit is changing) while the special map 2 is in the latent state where the front fluctuation occurs, the numerical image 176 or 178 indicates “+win (back fluctuation It means a big hit)" etc.

The increase effect 180 is an effect content for notifying the number of acquired balls in the condominium. Therefore, it is not limited to during the small hit rush (during the latent probability state, the small hit rush effect mode), but also during the short-time state (during the time-shortening effect mode) and during the probability variation state (during the probability variation effect mode). ) Can also be displayed. Further, during a specific game state (for example, during the probability variation state (during the probability variation effect mode) and/or during the time saving state (during the time saving effect mode), an emphasized number image (additional ball number notification effect effect) indicating the expectation of winning within the hold. ) 176 and/or the character images 179a, b may not be displayed.

(Specific example at the time of continuous vacation: Fig. 31D)
Next, with reference to FIG. 31D, an example of effects on the gaming machine 1 side and the data counter DT side in the “during long-distance vacation” will be described. FIG. 31D shows a case in which, in the above-mentioned FIG. 31A, when the jackpot 1 is won in the normal state and the state is shifted to the latent probability state, the “big jackpot 8 (latitude probability short time jackpot)” is won in the latent state. The transition of the production contents on the gaming machine 1 side (the production contents of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 and the decoration lamp 45) and the transition of the production contents of the data counter DT at the time of the big hit (the big hit notification mode on the DT side) are shown. Is. That is, FIG. 31D shows a case where the big hit this time is a big hit on the special figure 2 side (special figure 2 big hit) under the special figure 2 front changing state (special figure 1 back changing state). 31D to 31G described below, the same components as those of FIGS. 31A to 31B are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the details thereof will be appropriately omitted to avoid redundant description. To do.

FIG. 31D(8) shows an example of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 when the big hit (here, big hit 8) is won by the lottery on the special drawing 2 side in the latent state. In the example shown in FIGS. 31D (8) to (10), the number of the special figure 1 operation holding balls accumulated during the normal state is consumed by 1 and there are two reservations. In the situation where the maximum number of four is four, at the 140th rotation from the previous big hit, a performance example of a case where a big hit 8 (latitude time short big hit) in the symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side is shown is shown. It is a thing.

With reference to FIG. 31D (8), in the liquid crystal screen, the symbol variation display game 2 according to Toku-zu 2 is displayed as the main effect (effect in the substantiation effect mode) (Toku-zu 1 back fluctuation state, The special display area 160 is displayed in the lower left corner of the special figure 2 table variation state). In the same figure, when the hit variation of this special figure 2 (symbol fluctuation display game 2) ends, the decorative symbol 138 is stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols related to the type of big hit. Here, in the design variation display game 2 on the special drawing 2 side, which is the main effect, an example is shown in which "222 (time-saving and big-hit correspondence symbol)" showing the winning is stopped and displayed in the "big win 8" which is the latent accuracy time saving big hit. ing. However, in the figure, the stage of a state immediately before the fixed display of the variable display of special figure 2 is shown, and "222" of the decorative pattern 138 is in the temporary stop display state (swing fluctuation) immediately before the fixed display. Therefore, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31D (8) is that the special figure 1 operation holding balls number "2", the special figure 1 (fourth pattern 157) is in the changing state "⇔", the special figure 2 operation holding ball The number “4”, the special figure 2 (the fourth design 159) is in the changing state “⇔”. Here, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are changing in parallel.

After that, the big hit fluctuation of special figure 2 ends (decision display time elapses), the fluctuation of special figure 1 (4th design 157) which was in the state of change in parallel is forcibly stopped by the loose design (forced loose design) It is displayed and a big hit occurs. As a result, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31D (9) are as follows: Special figure 1 number of operation-holding balls “2”, special figure 1 is in a non-variable state (missing symbol stop state) “X”, special figure 2 The number of operation-holding balls is "4", and the special figure 2 is in a non-fluctuation state (big hit symbol stop state) "○".

FIG. 31D (9) shows the liquid crystal screen at the start of the big hit game and the effect situation on the data counter DT side. On the gaming machine 1 side, a signal during a big hit during variable length is output and an opening effect (big hit start effect) is started. On the liquid crystal screen, as a part of the opening effect, a big hit start effect 132 is displayed in which a "big hit" message is displayed on the Asahi flag background image and the decoration lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45) is illuminated in a rainbow color. Along with the big hit start effect 132, a right-hand hitting instruction effect 135 for instructing “right hit” appears.

Further, on the data counter DT side, the light emitting section DTa is caused to emit a rainbow-colored light upon receiving a signal during a big hit at the time of variation, and big hit notification is started to update the display content of the data counter DT. With regard to the display contents of the data counter, the number of jackpots DTd and the number of consecutive games DTe are updated to a value obtained by adding 1 to the current big hit (two times of big hits, one number of consecutive games caused by this big hit). .. Therefore, the display contents of the data counter DT in FIG. 31D (9) are as follows: the number of big hits DTd is “2”, the number of extended games DTe is “1”, the number of start times DTb is “140”, and the total number of revolutions DTc is “774 (previous 634th rotation+total 140th rotation of this time 774 rotations)". Unlike the time of the first hit, the big hit notification by the data counter DT is started before passing the game ball to the winning combination gate 57 at the time of the continuous vacation.

Then, when the combination gate effective waiting time (5 seconds) elapses, a gate winning instruction effect 137 appears on the liquid crystal screen as shown in FIG. 31D (10). When the game ball has passed the winning combination gate 57, the round game is started and the production (not shown) during the round is revealed. When the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57, a big hit signal is output, but the data counter DT side has already started the big hit notification in response to the "short hit big hit signal". Therefore, the big hit notification due to the big hit signal is not executed (there is no problem even if it is executed again). Then, when the big hit game of this time is finished, the signal during the big hit during the variable short period is turned off, and the data counter DT returns the value of the start count DTb to zero, assuming that the big hit is finished.

(End of big hit game → time saving state → normal state: Fig. 31E)
After the big hit game by the big hit 8 described in FIG. 31D is finished, the player enters the time saving state B (7 times of time saving) (see FIG. 4). FIG. 31E(11) shows the ending effect related to the big hit 8 (latent accuracy time shortening big hit), and FIGS. is there.

The ending effect 143 has effect contents for notifying that the time is to be shifted to the time saving state and the number of remaining time saving. In FIG. 31E(11), a time saving transition notification image 141 including an image of a disk and a mission message of “Enter chance mode! Has become.

When the big hit game by the big hit 8 ends, the ending effect 143 ends, and the game state shifts to a time saving state. Although not shown, in the time saving state, the special figure 1 front and back variation state (special figure 2 back variation state) is brought about, and the symbol variation display game 1 according to the special figure 1 is the main effect (effect under the time saving effect mode). Is displayed as. Further, as in the normal state or the latent state, the dedicated display area 160 is displayed in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal screen.

FIG. 31E(12) shows an example of the liquid crystal screen when the normal state is started (the first game after the end of the time saving state) after exiting the time saving state. In FIG. 31E(12), reference numeral 146 indicates a result effect. The result effect is generally an effect content including the fact that the time-saving state ends due to the current change (the effect of shifting to the normal state) and the information about the number of acquired balls acquired in a series of consecutive holidays. Therefore, the "result effect" is usually an effect that should appear in the symbol variation display game for the final time (in the present example, the seventh rotation of the final variation) when the time saving state ends.

However, in the present embodiment, due to the simultaneous variation type and its playability, etc., in the "time saving state", as the variation pattern at the time of losing the special figure 1, an ultra-high speed variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second (normal variation during time saving) 1s) is selected (see FIG. 35B). Therefore, it is impossible to secure the effect time width of the result effect at the seventh rotation of the final variation.

Therefore, the result effect is not made to appear during the time saving state, and the result effect is made to appear at the first rotation after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state. In the “normal state”, a fluctuation pattern of a minimum of 4 seconds can be selected. Therefore, the effect time width of the result effect itself is set within 4 seconds in consideration of the fact that the shortest variation pattern of 4 seconds (normal variation 4s) is selected. Of course, the above-mentioned result effect may be displayed in the symbol variation display game in which the time saving state ends. It suffices to configure such that a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time capable of sufficiently producing an effect is selected.

The result effect 146 does not notify that the time saving state ends with the current change, unlike the general result effect, because the result effect 146 appears in the first rotation (first game) after the transition to the normal condition. It is preferable that the effect is to suggest or suggest that the time saving state has been completely removed (falling into the normal state). For example, as shown in FIG. 31E (12), instead of a message such as “end of time saving mode”, a message (failure of first type approach encounter) 143 indicating that the mission of searching for a disk has failed, or a series of condominiums ( It includes an obtained number-of-balls notification effect 145 and the like indicating an approximate value of the number of acquired balls (“GET+3530”) obtained by including the first win. In addition, the first rotation after the transition to the normal state may be a result presentation in which the final variation in the time-saving state (the seventh rotation in this example) is disguised. In this case, in order to pretend that the normal state is a time saving state, it is preferable that the right-handing instruction effect 135 is not displayed and the left-handing instruction effect 147 described later is also not displayed (FIG. 31E (12)).

Further, during the normal state, as in the time saving state, the symbol variable display game 1 according to Toku-zu 1 is displayed as the main effect (effect under the normal effect mode). Therefore, on the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 31E (12), in addition to the decorative pattern 131 corresponding to the special figure 1, the hold icon corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold display area 76. Further, in order to display the result effect 146 in a large size on the liquid crystal screen, the decorative pattern of the special figure 1 (missing decorative pattern of "556") is displayed small in the lower right corner.

In FIG. 31E (12), the state of the variable display of the special figure 1 immediately before the confirmation display is shown, and the decorative symbol “556” is in the temporary stop display state (swing variation) immediately before the confirmation display. In addition, the display contents of the special display area 160 in FIG. 31E (12) are the special figure 1 operation reserved balls number "3", the special figure 1 is in the changing state "⇔", and the special figure 2 operation reserved balls number "3". The special map 2 is in the changing state “⇔”. Here, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are changing in parallel, but in this example, after that, the change of the special figure 1 is finished first, and the change state of the special figure 2 is continued. R.

In FIG. 31E (13) and thereafter, it is assumed that the player who is currently playing the game has come out of the time saving state and has quit the game ball and is preparing to leave.

FIG. 31E (13) shows the liquid crystal screen of the second rotation (second game) after shifting to the normal state. In the same figure, a vertical arrow drawn in a rectangular frame (in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36) indicates that the decorative pattern 131 is changing. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the result effect is displayed in the first game after the transition to the normal state, the left-handed instruction effect 147 is made to appear in the second game. The left-handing instruction effect 147 is displayed when the current game (second game) is started, and is displayed after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, about 4 seconds).

Further, the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 31E (13) shows a display state in which one special figure 1 operation holding ball is consumed from the previous game and two holding icons are displayed. In addition, the display contents of the special display area 160 in FIG. 31E (13) are the special figure 1 operation holding ball number "2", the special figure 1 is in the changing state "⇔", and the special figure 2 operation holding ball number "3" The special map 2 is in the changing state “⇔”. Here, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are changing in parallel.

(About the case where the player leaves the seat when the back fluctuation is in the midst of a big hit)
After that, all of the above-mentioned special figure 1 operation-holding balls are exhausted and the pattern variation display game 1 relating to the last operation-holding ball is completed, and special figure 1 is waiting with 0 special-piece 1 operation holding balls, and now The player, who has been playing games until then, confirms that the result of the final symbol variation display game is "miss", and realizes that the suspension of special figure 2 remains or is changing. Instead, assume the case where you left this game table. It should be noted that, after the player has left the seat, the explanation will be given on the assumption that no one is playing on the gaming table.

FIG. 31E (14) shows that for the special figure 1, there are no special figure 1 operation-retaining balls, and the decorative design 131 is in the stop display (waiting) with the lost design “135”, and for the special design 2, 3 One of the special feature 2 operation pending balls has been exhausted, a new variation of special feature 2 (pattern variation display game 2) has started, and the second action pending ball that has been used for this symbol variation is By chance, it shows a case where the big hit was held pending. To put it simply, the special figure 2 is a game situation in which the big hit is fluctuating (the big hit fluctuation during the back fluctuation (normally 4 minutes per fluctuation)) under the special figure 2 back fluctuation state. Therefore, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31E (14) is the special figure 1 operation reserve ball number "0", the special figure 1 is in a non-fluctuation state (missing symbol stop state) "X", the special figure 2 operation The number of reserved balls is “2”, and the special map 2 is in a fluctuating state (here, during a big hit change) “⇔”.

When the operation-holding ball of the special figure 2 is stored, as already described, in the case of the loss variation or the small hit variation in the “normal state”, the variation time is 600 seconds (10 minutes variation except the latent accuracy variation 1 6), even in the case of a big hit, the symbol variation display game 2 is played for a long time of 240 seconds (variation per 4 minutes in the normal).

During the normal state, there is a relationship of "special figure 1 front and back variation state, special figure 2 back variation state". Therefore, on the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 31E (14), the effect relating to the symbol variation display game 2 on the special diagram 2 side does not appear, and the result of the last symbol variation display game 1 on the special diagram 1 side executed. As a result, the decorative pattern 131 corresponding to Toku-zu 1 is in a state of being stopped and displayed at "135 (missing eye)" indicating a loss.

Then, after a lapse of time, the big hit fluctuation during the back fluctuation (normally fluctuation per 4 minutes) ends. As a result, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31F (15) is "0" for the special figure 1 operation-holding balls, "X" for the special figure 1 is in the non-variable state (missing symbol stop state), and the special figure 2 The number of operation-holding balls is "2", the special figure 2 is in a non-fluctuation state (big hit symbol stopped state) "○", and the special figure 2 of the back fluctuation is a big hit.

FIG. 31F (15) shows the gaming situation in which the special jackpot 2 back jackpot has been generated after the jackpot variation during the back variation (normally four minutes per variation) has ended. In the figure, on the liquid crystal screen, in the vicinity of the upper part of the dedicated display area 160 or in a partially overlapping display form, a "back right strike instruction effect 135a" for instructing "right strike" appears. The back-right strike instruction effect 135a is displayed smaller than the dedicated display area 160. In addition, when the big hit game by the back big hit occurs, it is a right hitting instruction effect that is displayed without any other related effects.

The back-right-handing instruction effect 135a is ended after the winning combination gate valid waiting time (5 seconds) has elapsed. This point is the same as in the case of the big hit in the special figure 1 table shown in FIGS. 31A(2) and 31B(3). Whether or not it is a big hit due to back fluctuation can be grasped by the effect control unit 24 by a "big hit start command" transmitted from the main control unit 20 at the time of starting the big hit game. This jackpot start command includes the gaming state information at the time of winning and the jackpot type information that is won. When the big hit start command is received, the effect control unit 24, if the information contained in this is, for example, the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state and the big hit type is any of the big hits 5 to 8, It is possible to understand that the big hit is a big hit due to back fluctuation. Of course, another command may be used or a dedicated command may be provided so that the effect control unit 24 side can identify whether or not it is a big hit due to back fluctuation.

Referring to FIG. 31F (16), after the winning combination gate valid waiting time (5 seconds) has elapsed, a "reverse gate winning instruction effect 137a" for instructing the winning combination gate 57 to pass the game ball is displayed. This back gate winning instruction effect 137a is a gate winning instruction effect that is displayed without any other related effects, like the back right hitting instruction effect 135a. The back gate winning instruction effect 137a is displayed until the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57. This point is the same as when the special figure 1 table big hit shown in FIG. 31B (3)) is achieved.

As for the decorative lamp 45 (around LED 45), since the big hit this time is the special big hit on the back of the special drawing 2, the light effect of a normal big hit (for example, the decorative lamp 45 of the gaming machine 1 of FIG. 31A (2) (big hit start) The production 132)) is not executed. In the present embodiment, the light effect and the sound effect are in the same effect state (for example, turned off) as when waiting for a customer. In this effect state, it waits for the game ball to pass through the winning combination gate 57.

In this way, in the present embodiment, when the big hit this time is the special figure 2 back big hit, although the indication effects 135 and 137 appear, the display is executed swiftly, and the special figure 1 table big hit No big hit start effect (opening effect) appears, but it is secretly notified as much as possible that it is a big hit. In this way, by taking measures against the backside jackpot in the hitting performance as well, it is possible to prevent the feeling of discomfort given to the surroundings even if a big hit suddenly occurs from an unattended gaming machine, and effectively prevent hyena action. You can do it.

In FIG. 31F(17), when a game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57, a big hit mid-range signal is output as usual in the same manner as in FIG. 31B(4). Is started. Further, the data counter DT side also starts the big hit notification, and updates the data display contents (the big hit number DTd etc.) (see the data counter DT in the lower part of FIG. 31B (4)).

(Special big hit notification production: Figure 31F)
By the way, under the game situation of FIGS. 31F (15) and (16) described above, it is in a state of a big hit game (here, a big hit game by the back big hit of Tokushu 2), but the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57. Until then, the back gate winning instruction effect 137a continues to appear and is in a state of waiting for the start of the round game. This back gate winning instruction effect 137a is a relatively small message displayed in the lower left corner and is hard to notice. It is assumed that the player seated on the game table in such a state starts the game while hitting the left and aiming for a prize at the middle starting opening 34, as usual. Also, in the simultaneous fluctuation type, when one special map is a big hit, the fluctuation of the other special map stops due to forced loss, or the fluctuation display continues while the time of the fluctuation time is interrupted Even if the game ball is won in the middle starting opening 34, the variable display of the decorative symbol does not start, and the player is distrusted. In such a case, it is preferable to promptly inform the player that a big hit (back big hit) is in progress.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the big hit currently occurring is due to the big hit (back big hit) winning on the back fluctuation state side, it is notified that the back big hit is under the predetermined appearance condition. It is configured to be able to show "special big hit announcement notice production". The appearance condition of the special big hit mid-announcement presentation can be, for example, the following conditions A and B.

(Condition A) The jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery on the special drawing side that causes back fluctuation, and a predetermined time T has elapsed from the start of the jackpot fluctuation (the relationship of “fluctuation time≦T” is satisfied).
(Condition B) There was a prize at the starting port on the special map side that causes table fluctuation.
Under the condition that the above condition A and condition B are satisfied, a special big hit mid-sized notification effect is displayed.

Explaining with a specific example, the main control unit 20 wins the big hits on the special map 2 side during the normal state (special figure 2 back big hit), and it is a big hit fluctuation pattern related to the back fluctuation "normal When “4 minutes per minute” is selected, a fluctuation pattern designating command that can specify the fluctuation is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation during the normal 4 minutes is measured. Then, as the predetermined time, for example, the fluctuation per four minutes normally ends. When 4 minutes have passed, a dedicated effect control command (back big hit medium command) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the production control unit 24 receives the back big hit command, the production control unit 24 controls the production state (production mode) to the "special big hit medium notice production execution waiting state", and waits for winning at the special figure 1 starting port. Specifically, it waits for the pending addition command on the special figure 1 side to be sent. As described above, when one special figure is a big hit, a new variation cannot be started in the other special figure, and the main control unit 20 waits for the hold addition command. This is because, for example, a variation pattern designation command) cannot be transmitted. Therefore, the hold addition command is optimal as the command that triggers the execution of the special big hit mid-range notification effect.

The production control unit 24 causes the special big hit mid-announcement presentation to appear when the holding addition command on the special map 1 side is received in the special big hit mid-range notification production waiting state. The effect contents of the special big hit mid-announcement effect are not particularly limited, but it is preferable that the effect contents are such that the back big hit is in progress. For example, from the viewpoint of the kindness instruction effect described above, at least the right-handing instruction effect 135 is largely displayed on the liquid crystal screen regardless of whether or not the combination gate effective waiting time has elapsed, and the player is allowed to right-hand. It is preferable to encourage. It should be noted that, when the big hit start command is received, it is possible to control the special big hit mid-announcement presentation execution waiting state. In this case, it is possible to control from the time of the back big hit to the state of waiting for the special big hit mid-range notification effect execution.

(Backward change big hit notice production: Figure 31G)
In addition, the same problem as in the game situation of FIG. 31F (15) (16) described above, when the game situation of FIG. 31E (14), that is, the back fluctuation is during big hit fluctuation (during fluctuation per 4 minutes during normal) Can also occur.

Specifically, in the game situation of FIG. 31E (14), the back fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation (normally a fluctuation per 4 minutes). Since the main effect of the game stand in this state is the variable pattern display game 1, the player normally makes a left-hand stroke and proceeds with the game while aiming for a prize in the middle starting opening 34. It is thought that it will go. However, when the special figure 2 is a big hit variation, the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 executed during the change becomes a “lottery without big hit (miss lottery)”, and how much the middle start opening 34 is won. Even if you win the big hit lottery, you will be returned to nothing. In such a case, it is preferable to promptly inform the player that the back fluctuation currently being executed is a big hit fluctuation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot change related to the back variation is occurring, a "back variation medium/big hit announcement effect" that notifies that the back variation is a jackpot can be displayed under predetermined appearance conditions. You can do it. The appearance condition of the back variation medium-big hit announcement effect can be, for example, the following condition C.

(Condition C) The big hit (for example, one of the big hits 5 to 8) is won in the big hit lottery on the special drawing side (for example, special drawing 2 in the normal state) related to the back fluctuation (special drawing 2 back big hit winning), When the special map related to the big hit is changing (when the special map 2 is changing (the symbol variation display game 2 is being executed)), the starting port (for example, the special map 1) on the special map side related to the table change (for example, , The middle start opening 34) was won (condition C-1), or the fluctuation on the special map side (special figure 1) related to the table fluctuation was started (condition C-2).
Under the condition that the above-mentioned condition C is satisfied, the back variation medium big hit advance notice effect is displayed. Note that either of the above (condition C-1) and the above (condition C-2) can be adopted.

To explain using a specific example, the main control unit 20 wins the big hit on the special map 2 side in the normal state (special figure 2 back big hit), and "variation per 4 minutes during normal" related to the big hit win. When is selected, a fluctuation pattern designation command that can specify the fluctuation is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the production control unit 24 receives this variation pattern designation command, the production control unit 24 recognizes that the variation pattern of this time is “variation per four minutes during normal operation”, and “reverse variation is performed until the variation ends. It is controlled to "wait for big hit announcement production execution". When the above-mentioned (condition C-1) is used as the appearance condition, the effect control unit 24 waits for the holding addition command on the special figure 1 side to be sent, and then displays the above (condition C-2). When it is set as the output condition, it waits for the variation pattern designation command according to Toku-zu 1 to be sent. The production control unit 24 receives the pending addition command on the special map 1 side (in the case of the above (condition C-1)) or the variation pattern designation command in the back variation mid-big hit announcement production execution waiting state. In the case (in the case of the above (condition C-2)), the back variation medium big hit advance notice effect is displayed. In the case of showing the back variation medium-big hit advance notice effect, it is possible to make the player's surprise hit by suddenly causing the impact to be high. For example, after displaying the blackout display on the liquid crystal screen (blackout effect), the back fluctuation medium big hit notice effect is displayed.

(Specific example of the backside change big hit notice production: Fig. 31G)
FIG. 31G shows a production example of the back variation medium-big hit announcement production. Here, as in FIG. 31E (14), as for the special figure 1, the special figure 1 operation holding balls are 0, and the decorative symbol 131 is in the stop display (waiting) with the missing symbol “135”, and the special symbol As for No. 2, it is assumed that the special figure 1 has two operation-holding balls and that the special figure 2 is normally changing per 4 minutes (big hit change related to backside change). In this game situation, FIG. 31G (14A) shows that the middle start opening 34 is won and the above condition (condition C-1) or condition (condition C-2) is satisfied, and the back fluctuation medium big hit notice effect is displayed. It shows the case. Therefore, the display contents of the special display area 160 in FIG. 31G (14A) are as follows: Special figure 1 operation reserve balls “0”, special figure 1 fluctuation state “⇔”, special figure 2 operation reserve balls “2” , Toku-zu 2 is in a fluctuating state (normally fluctuating per 4 minutes) and becomes “⇔”. Further, FIG. 31G (14B) shows the back fluctuation medium-big hit announcement effect after 30 seconds have passed from the state of FIG. 31G (14A).

Reference numeral 173 of FIG. 31G (14A) is a back fluctuation medium-big hit announcement effect. The back fluctuating medium-big hit announcement effect 173 has effect contents including a countdown timer 170, a message 171, a plurality of disc images 133, and the like.

The countdown timer effect 170 displays the elapsed time (may be a rough value) from the start of the big hit variation (variation per 4 minutes during normal operation) related to the back variation (here, special figure 2), and to what extent it ends at the present time. A countdown display is provided to inform the player whether or not the fluctuation has ended and the jackpot will start. In addition, the message 171 consists of "A super chance has arrived! Don't shoot the ball! Wait 200 seconds remaining without leaving the seat!", and (a) "Special chance variation!" 2 (Backward fluctuation) is that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high or accurate, and (b) If you shoot the ball with the "Do not shoot the ball!" message, it may be a waste ball. (C) It is possible to notify that the jackpot right may be lost if the user leaves the seat by the message "Please wait for 200 seconds remaining without leaving the seat!". Further, the UFO (plurality of disc images 133) of the large corps is displayed, and the cow image 134 is displayed therein. This cow image 134 indicates that there is a high probability that the big hit 5 to 7 (probability variation big hit in normal time) is highly likely. In the present embodiment, when the cow image 134 appears in the UFO group, it is a big hit. It indicates that one of 5 to 7 is won.

In addition, the back fluctuation mid-big hit announcement effect 173 is one aspect of the winning effect that notifies that the back fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation (big hit winning state). Therefore, while the back fluctuation mid-big hit notice effect 173 is appearing, the notice effect (reach effect etc.) and the look-ahead notice effect related to the symbol variation display game 1 (front variation side) on the special figure 1 side are not displayed, and the notice is given. Even if the production is running, cancel all. However, the decorative pattern 131 according to Toku-zu 1 is not displayed during the change, but at the end of the change, a small gap is stopped and displayed in the lower right corner, and the symbol variation display game 1 on the Toku-zu 1 side is finished. This is notified (see FIG. 31G (14B)). Further, while the back variation mid-big hit notification effect 173 is appearing, the "left-handed warning notification effect" and the "right-handed warning notification effect" are not executed.

<Processing on main controller side: FIGS. 8A to 30C>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8A to FIG. 30C, a game operation process on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The main control unit 20 side includes an infinite loop main process (main control side main process: FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt) activated by a timed interrupt from the CTC. Processing: FIG. 13).

<10. Main processing on main control side: FIGS. 8A and 8B>
Main processing (main control side main processing) on the main control unit 20 side will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8. 8A and 8 are flowcharts showing details of main processing on the side of the main control unit 20. This main process is started when the system is reset at the time of recovery from a power failure or power failure, or when the control program runs out of control, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is activated and the CPU There is a case where it is forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first initializes the register values of the units including the CPU 201, monitors the power supply state of the peripheral board, and the like. The initial setting process required to start the game operation is executed (step S011). The initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the initial setting process of step S011 is completed, the information of the input port 1 (not shown) is acquired and set in the W register (step S012), the W register is subjected to a predetermined mask process, and the “setting key switch 94 ( (Input key signal), RAM clear switch 98 (RAM clear signal), and door open sensor 61 (door open signal)” are input (ON/OFF state) (step S013). The information of the input port 1 according to the present embodiment (information indicated by the least significant bit (b0) to the most significant bit (b7)) is the ON/OFF state (b0) of the setting key signal (setting key switch 94) as illustrated. ), RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98) ON/OFF state (b1), door open signal (door open sensor 61) ON/OFF state (b2), disconnection detection signal 1 (b3), disconnection detection signal 2 (B4), ON/OFF state of counting error signal (ball counting sensor 19b) (b5), ON/OFF state of replenishment out signal (replenishment outage detection sensor 19a) (b6), power-on signal and payout communication confirmation signal Is in the ON/OFF state (b7). For example, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM, and normally has a value corresponding to the ON/OFF state of the RAM clear switch 98 operated by the hall clerk. There is. The setting key signal is one of the signals for determining whether or not to shift to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, and like the RAM clear switch described above, the setting key that is usually operated by the hall clerk. It has a value corresponding to the ON/OFF state of the switch 94. Therefore, if the acquisition timing of the RAM clear signal or the setting change signal is delayed, the hall clerk will miss the ON operation by releasing the switch, but in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a situation. In addition, these signals are promptly acquired when the power is restored.

In the present embodiment, a combination of ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door opening sensor 61, specifically, the bit pattern “W of the lower 3 bits of the W register obtained in step S013. (X, y, z): x, y, z=1 (ON state) or 0 (OFF state)” according to the transition processing state (branch determination condition), which will be described later. S022)", "setting confirmation process (step S026)", "area RAM clear process (step S028)", and "backup restoration process (step S027)". It is like this. The above-mentioned transition processing state (branch determination condition) is as shown in FIG. 8C. In the case of W (1, 1, 1), it is the “setting change transition state”, and in the case of W (1, 0, 1 or 0). Indicates the "setting confirmation transition state", the W (0, 1, 1 or 0) "RAM clear transition state", and the W (0, 0, 1 or 0) "backup recovery transition state" .. Since the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are provided inside the gaming machine, the front frame 2 must be opened when operating these switches, so normally the door opening sensor 61 is , ON state (door open signal ON). Further, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the control load, at least until the game startable state is completed (for example, before the processing of step S035 (CTC setting processing) described later is executed (main control side in FIG. 13). Before the timer interrupt process is started), or at least before the loop process of steps S039 to S042 is executed), even if the front frame 2 is in the open state (door open state), the door open error notification is executed. It is supposed not to. However, when the door opening sensor 61 is in the ON state, information indicating that the door opening sensor 61 is ON is transmitted to the hall computer HC by a security signal.

(Setting change processing execution processing route: steps S020 to S023)
In the process of step S014, it is determined whether or not the bit pattern of the W register is W (1, 1, 1) corresponding to the setting change transition state (step S014). If it is W (1, 1, 1) (step S014:=W(1, 1, 1)), it is determined that the state is the “setting change transition state”, and the fact that the setting is being changed is designated first. "Setting change command (BA5AH)" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S020). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting change display command, the effect means is used to execute the setting change effect for notifying that the setting value is being changed. For example, all the decoration lamps 45 are turned on in blue, the speaker 16 outputs the alarm sound “Setting is being changed”, and the effect image “Setting is being changed” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

Next, an in-area RAM initialization process (RAM clear process at power-on) is executed (step S021). In this area RAM initialization processing, all areas (normal data) except the setting value storage area in the area RAM for storing data used in normal game processing (game processing of symbol variation display game, etc.) The storage area) is initialized (cleared) and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state (step S021). In the present embodiment, the program and the storage area for the processing related to performance display are different from the area (in-area memory (first memory area)) that the CPU 201 accesses during normal game progress (out-of-area memory (second memory) Memory area))). Specifically, the main control unit 20 is a first RAM area (in-area RAM) capable of storing game data used in a game process related to normal game progress (for example, a process other than the process related to the display of the performance indicator 99). ) And a second RAM area (out-of-area RAM) that can store information display data used in information display processing not directly related to the game progress (steps S033 and S040 of FIG. 8B, step S101 of FIG. 13, FIG. 28, etc.) ), a RAM 203, a first ROM area (in-area ROM) for storing a game control program for executing the normal game processing, and a first ROM area for storing an information display control program for executing the information display processing. A ROM 202 including a 2ROM area (outside area ROM), and a CPU 201 that executes a game control operation based on a game control program and an information display control program are configured. Here, only the RAM area related to the in-area memory (in-area RAM) is to be cleared. Note that the data in the setting value storage area (setting value data) is not cleared even if it is the data in the RAM in the area. Initialization and change of the set value data are performed in the setting change process (FIG. 11) described later.

Various flags used mainly in step S039 of FIG. 8B and steps S081 to S085, S089 to S095, S097 to S100 of the timer interrupt processing of FIG. Various kinds of data such as an operation timer and a counter are stored (stored in a storage area corresponding to the various kinds of data), and typical ones include the following data.

Flags related to various functions to specify the game state ("university officer open extension state flag" to specify the operating state of the opening extension function, "normal symbol time saving state flag" to specify the operating state of the normal symbol time saving function "Normal symbol probability variation state flag" that specifies the operating state of normal symbol probability variation function, "Special symbol time saving state flag" that specifies the operating state of special symbol time saving function, "Special symbol" that specifies the operating state of special symbol probability changing function Probability change state flag")
"Special symbol time reduction counter" that counts the number of times of special symbol time saving function, "Special symbol probability variation counter" that counts the number of operations of special symbol probability changing function,
Various data related to the big hit lottery result (big hit determination flag, small hit determination flag, special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, etc.)
"Various data relating to the execution of the winning game (current round number (special electric auditors operation frequency), specified round number, special winning prize winning number, condition device operation flag, small hit medium flag, role object continuous operation device operation flag etc)",
"Parameters related to the operating state of special symbols (special symbol stop 1 flag, special symbol stop 2 flag, changing flag, special symbol operation status, special symbol operation confirmation data, etc.)", "various operation timers for managing game progress (performance Except for timers related to display)",
"Game state data (game state number YJ) capable of specifying the current game state",
"Input/output data related to switches/sensors (excluding sensor input data related to performance indicators such as winning holes)",
It is a “winning counter for counting the number of winning balls”, “various error flags” and the like.
In any case, when the in-area RAM initialization process (step S021) is executed, all data other than specific data (set value data, data used to display the base value) is set to the initial state. ..

Although details will be described later, a predetermined area (outside area RAM) of the RAM 203 related to the area outside memory, that is, a RAM area related to performance information (measurement information storage area, performance display storage area, LED data setting related to the performance indicator 99). Area)) performs initialization processing (outside area RAM clear processing) when a problem occurs in the RAM area in the performance display monitor processing (step S101) of FIG. (See step S101 in FIG. 13, step S823 in FIG. 28, FIG. 30A, etc.). In this way, the work area of the RAM 203 is divided, and the RAM outside the area is not initialized (cleared) in the RAM initialization processing when the power is turned on. As a result, even when the RAM initialization process is performed when the power is turned on, the data such as the number of normally paid out items, the number of normally outed items, and the base value related to the performance display can be taken over across the power interruption. It is possible.

Then, when the in-area RAM initialization process (step S021) is finished, a setting change process for changing the set value is then executed (step S022). Details of this setting change processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that in order to determine that the setting change transition state (the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state (here, the door opening sensor 61 is in the ON state)), the game machine It is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 while the power source (main power source) is turned off (power source off), and to turn on the power source (power source on) in the on state. That is, in order to change the set value, the front frame 2 is opened, the setting key switch 94 is put in the set value change mode side (ON operation) while the power of the gaming machine is OFF, and the RAM clear switch 98 is set. It is necessary to turn on the power while keeping ON. This means that when the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on after turning on the power of the gaming machine, it takes at least several seconds from turning on the power to turning on the power, and the process of step S014 is performed during that time. This is because it is determined that the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is in the OFF state (step S014:≠W(1,1,1)), and the setting change process of step S022 is not executed. .. In this case, as shown in the figure, the processing route in which step S015 is executed is followed, and thereafter, the setting value changing operation is prohibited. Therefore, when it is desired to change the set value and the power is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98, the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are temporarily turned off. The power may be turned on again with the ON operation performed. When the setting change process is executed, the allowable state of the setting change operation is maintained even if the RAM clear switch 98 is turned off.

When the setting change process (step S022) is completed, the customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted (step S023), and the process proceeds to step S032 shown in FIG. 8B described later. When the production control unit 24 receives the customer waiting command, the customer waiting standby production (customer waiting demo screen) for explaining the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and introducing it (demonstration) based on predetermined appearance conditions. Bring out. Note that the processes after the process of step S032 will be described later for convenience of description.

Returning to the description of step S014, if the bit pattern of the W register is not W(1,1,1) corresponding to the setting change transition state (step S014:≠W(1,1,1)), then a RAM error occurs. It is determined whether there is any (step S015). The data in the RAM area to be determined here is the set value data in the set value storage area. In the present embodiment, six levels of setting values 1 to 6 are defined, and values 00H to 05H are defined as data for specifying these setting values 1 to 6. Therefore, any set value data (normal value) of 00H to 05H should be stored in the set value storage area. However, the set value data may be an abnormal value other than 00H to 05H due to some trouble such as noise.

Therefore, in this processing, the setting data is acquired from the setting value storage area, and when the acquired setting value is not any value of 00H to 05H (not a normal value), that is, the acquired setting value is 1 to 6 If none of the above applies (step S015: YES), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the set value data (the set value data is not valid), the process proceeds to step S018, and the power is turned on again as the RAM error process. The command (0B07H) is transmitted (step S018). When the production control unit 24 receives the power re-input command, the production means is used to execute the power re-instruction production. For example, all the decoration lamps 45 are turned on in red, an alarm sound is output from the speaker 16, and a liquid crystal display device 36 displays an effect image such as “Reconnect the RAM error power and set the set value to 1”. Display it. Then, a first power supply abnormality check process shown in FIG. 10A described later is executed (step S019).

When it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal in the determination process of step S015 (step S015: NO), it is determined whether the backup flag BF is the normal value (5AH) (step S016). The backup flag BF is set to 5AH (normal value) in the second power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 13) described later. The contents of the backup flag BF should be 5 AH when the power is turned on or when the power is restored from the power failure. However, if a problem occurs for some reason and the backup flag BF is not a normal value (00H or the like) (step S016: ≠5AH), as in the case of the above-described RAM abnormality (when the determination result of step S014 is YES). Similarly, the process proceeds to step S018, the power re-input command (0B07H) is transmitted (step S018), and the first power abnormality check process is executed (step S019).

(10-2-1. First power supply abnormality check process: FIG. 10A)
The process of the first power supply abnormality check process (step S019) will be described. FIG. 10A is a flowchart showing details of the first power supply abnormality check processing.

In FIG. 10A, the CPU 201 first clears WDT (step S056) and exits the first power supply abnormality check process unless the ON state of the power supply abnormality signal indicating power failure is confirmed (step S057: NO). .. That is, when an abnormality (RAM error) occurs in the stored contents of the RAM 203, the WDT clear process (step S056) and the power interruption confirmation process (step S057) are put into a power-on waiting state in which the process is repeated indefinitely. Therefore, when a RAM error occurs, the process related to the game progress does not proceed thereafter, and the power is turned on again (in the case of the present embodiment, the setting change process of step S022 is executed) The operation will be stopped (game stop processing). When a RAM error occurs, the WDT clear process is executed until the power supply abnormality signal is confirmed, and the WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop process is repeated.

When the ON state of the power supply abnormality signal is confirmed (step S057: YES), the process returns to step S011 in FIG. 8A, and the processes after step S011 are sequentially executed as at the time of turning on the power.

However, in the present embodiment, even if a RAM error such as a setting value data abnormality (RAM abnormality) or a backup abnormality (backup flag abnormality) occurs, the contents of the RAM 203 are cleared in the subsequent processing (steps S018 to S019). No processing is performed. Therefore, if the set value data and backup data remain in a damaged state, the damaged data remains even if the power is turned on again, and the setting change transition state (W register =W(1,1,1)), steps S018 to S019 are executed again. Therefore, once a RAM error occurs, the RAM error is not eliminated even if the power is simply turned on, and the RAM error is not eliminated unless the setting change process of step S022 is executed. Therefore, in step S018, the power control signal is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 36 by the power control unit 24 that has received the power control signal and notifies the RAM error (power repower instruction command performance). Please set the set value to 1" and display the effect image to prompt the hall clerk to eliminate the RAM error.

Returning to the description of step S015 in FIG. 8A. If the RAM is not abnormal (step S015: NO) and the backup flag BF is the normal value (5 AH) (step S016:=5 AH), the W register is subjected to a predetermined mask process and the setting key switch 94 (setting) is set. Input information of the key signal) and the RAM clear switch 98 (RAM clear signal) is acquired (step S017).

(Backup restoration processing execution processing route: step S24→S027)
Next, with reference to FIG. 8B, it is determined whether or not the bit pattern of the W register is W(0,0) corresponding to the backup recovery transition state (step S024). If W(0,0) (step S024:=W(0,0)), it is determined that the state is the "backup recovery transition state (see FIG. 8C)", and is based on the backed-up game information immediately before power-off. Then, a backup restoration process for resuming the game is executed (step S27).

In this backup restoration process, first, the stack pointer before power shutdown is restored based on the stored contents of RAM (backup data saved at power shutdown) saved by the backup function (not shown) at power shutdown. , Performs a return process necessary for starting a game from a processing state when the power is cut off, and restores a game operation when the power is cut off (game returning means). In addition, here, predetermined game information (for example, special figure 1 and special figure 2 operation holding ball (holding data) at the time of power off, information on winning game, game state information, etc.) is acquired from the backup data, and the information is obtained. One or a plurality of types of included game return commands are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the production control unit 24 receives the game return command, it grasps the game progress state when the power is cut off based on the game information included in the command, and restores the production state when the power is cut off. Then, when the restoration process is finished, a power failure restoration display command (BA03H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the backup restoration process is finished. When the effect control unit 24 receives the power failure recovery display command, the "recovery completion effect" for notifying that the recovery is completed is displayed using the effect means. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is caused to display an effect image such as "Returned from power failure, please restart game." When the backup restoration process is completed, the process proceeds to step S032 described later.

(RAM clear processing execution processing route: step S25→S028 to S030)
Returning to the explanation of step S024 in FIG. 8B, if the bit pattern of the W register is not W(0,0) corresponding to the backup recovery transition state (step S024:≠W(0,0)), then the W register It is determined whether or not the bit pattern is W(0,1) corresponding to the RAM clear transition state (step S025). If it is W (0, 1) (step S025:=W(0, 1)), it is determined that the state is the “RAM clear transition state (see FIG. 8C)”, and the in-area RAM processing process is executed (step S028). .. The in-area RAM processing processing in step S028 is common to the in-area RAM processing processing in step S021. Next, a RAM clear command (BA20H) and a customer waiting command (BA04H) are sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S029) to inform the surroundings that the RAM has been cleared (including notification to the hall computer HC). A predetermined notification time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the RAM clear notification timer as a time for this (step S030). When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, the effect mode is set to the initial state "normal effect mode", the effect state is returned to the initial state, and an error corresponding to the RAM clear is generated by using the effect means. The notification (RAM clear notification effect) is executed for 30 seconds, which is the same as the setting time of the notification timer. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully lit in red, an alarm sound when the RAM is cleared is output from the speaker 16, and a liquid crystal display device 36 displays an effect image such as “RAM is being cleared”. In step S029, the RAM clear command and the customer waiting command are transmitted, but at this timing, the customer waiting standby effect is not executed, and after the RAM clear notification is executed for 30 seconds, the customer waiting standby is executed. Perform the performance. For example, the alarm sound is faded out, and a customer waiting demo screen or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. In this embodiment, the RAM clear notification effect (RAM clear notification) is executed with the highest priority.

As described above, in the in-area RAM initialization process (steps S021, S028) according to the present embodiment, the set value storage area (set value data) in the in-area RAM is not initialized, and the set value data is Initialization/change (including clearing of the backup flag BF) is performed in a setting change process (FIG. 11) described later. Therefore, if the in-area RAM initialization processing in step S028 (the same applies when the set value is not changed after the initialization in step S021 (the same setting is overridden)) is simply executed, the setting is performed. The value remains the same as it was when the power was turned off last time, but the game is started with the game state and hold data etc. initialized (normal state and initial state with no hold data etc.) .. Thus, for example, when it is desired to inherit only the set value from the business of the previous day, the clearing work can be completed by the simple operation of turning on/off the RAM clear switch 98 without performing a setting change operation that often involves many work steps. There is an advantage that.

(Setting confirmation processing execution processing route: step S24→S026)
On the other hand, when the bit pattern of the W register is not W(0,1) corresponding to the RAM clear transition state (step S025:=W(1,0)), that is, "setting confirmation transition state (see FIG. 8C)". If it is W (1, 0) corresponding to, the setting confirmation process related to the setting value confirmation work is executed (step S026). Details of this setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the setting confirmation process is completed, the backup restoration process (step S027) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S032.

As described above, depending on the combination of the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door opening sensor 61, “setting change processing (step S022)” and “setting confirmation processing (step S026)”. , "In-area RAM clearing process (step S028)" or "backup restoring process (step S027)" is executed, and when the process ends, the contents of all registers are saved (step S032), The operation check timer setting process (FIG. 8D) described later is executed (step S033), and the contents of all the saved registers are restored (step S034).

(10-2-2. Operation confirmation timer setting process: FIG. 8D)
The process of the operation confirmation timer setting process (step S033) will be described. FIG. 8D is a flowchart showing details of the operation confirmation timer setting process. In this operation confirmation timer setting process, initial setting required for confirmation operation when the power of the performance indicator 99 is turned on is performed. In the present embodiment, as a part of the process when the power is turned on, in order to check the operation of the performance indicator 99, after turning on the power, the four 7-segment LEDs are all turned on and turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). It is designed to perform "operation confirmation display" in which all lights are periodically blinked and all blinks. The process related to the operation confirmation display of the performance indicator 99 (operation confirmation process) is performed during the performance display monitor process in the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) described later (step S101 in FIG. 13, FIG. 28 step S833, FIG. 30B).

Here, after the series of power-on processing in steps S011 to S030 is completed, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) is started in step S035. If the timer interrupt process is started from, the performance display monitor process is also executed from the time the power is turned on, and if the operation confirmation timer setting process is executed in the dark, the operation confirmation display will be displayed during setting confirmation or setting change. Will be executed and the operation check will be neglected. In addition, when the power is turned off or the system is reset and the power is restored (when the power is reset), various power-on processing such as setting confirmation processing, setting change processing, and backup restoration processing can be executed, so it is possible to check the operation in dark clouds. If the timer setting process is executed, the process becomes complicated, and it may not be possible to smoothly arrange the game start state. In addition, it may lead to a control burden. Further, in the present embodiment, the time interval of the timer interrupt process is about 4 ms, but depending on the control program, the interrupt time interval may be executed in an extremely short time such as about 1 ms. If is executed, the base value may be displayed earlier than the operation confirmation display, and the operation check may be complicated. In consideration of these various circumstances, it is preferable that the operation confirmation timer setting process is executed at least before the timer interrupt process is activated (before step S035), and when the series of power-on of steps S011 to S030 is performed. It is more preferable to execute the processing after the processing is finished and before the timer interrupt processing of step S035 is started. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, after a series of power-on processing including setting confirmation processing, backup restoration processing, setting change processing, area RAM clear processing, etc. is completed, the timer interrupt processing is activated. The operation confirmation timer setting process is performed before the CTC setting process related to.

Returning to the description of FIG. 8D, the CPU 201 first stores a stack pointer for identifying the stack area in a predetermined area (step S881). Next, an initial value (for example, 5000 ms) is set to the operation confirmation timer that counts the operation confirmation time of the performance indicator 99 (step S882), and the blinking timer that counts the blinking cycle of the performance indicator 99 is cleared to zero (blinking). Timer ←0) (step S883). Then, the stack pointer is restored, and the operation confirmation timer setting process is exited.

When the processing of steps S032 to S034 related to the operation confirmation is completed, then, the CTC setting processing for periodically generating a timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms (step S035). After that, an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 is executed. Although details will be described later, in the main control side timer interrupt process, an input management process for monitoring the ON/OFF state of switches, an LED management process for performing LED display control, a control process for a pattern variation display game, and a winning game control. Various processes related to the progress of the game, such as processes, are executed.

Next, assuming that the game startable state is ready, the emission control signal (emission permission signal ES) is set from the OFF state to the ON state (step S036). Specifically, a firing control signal that permits the firing operation of the firing device 32 is output to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the launch control signal, the payout control board 29 determines that it is in the launch permitted state, outputs the launch control signal to the launch control board 28, and permits the launch operation by the launch device 32. Thereby, the firing operation is controlled from the firing operation prohibited state to the firing operation allowable state, and the gaming ball can be fired by the firing operation handle 15. In the present embodiment, the payout control signal from the main control unit 20 is received by the payout control board 29 to permit the firing operation, that is, the instruction information of the approval of the firing from the main control section 20 is sent through the payout control board 29. Although it is configured to be indirectly sent to the firing control board 28, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the firing control signal from the main controller 20 may be directly output to the firing control board 28 to permit the firing operation.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the firing control signal is not output before the processing of step S035 is executed (the firing permission signal is controlled to the OFF state during the initialization processing of step S011). (See step S046 of FIG. 9 described later), that is, the firing is prohibited. Therefore, for example, when performing the setting change operation, the firing control signal is not output (controlled to the OFF state) until the setting change process (step S022) is finished, and the firing control signal is output after the setting change process is finished. (Control the firing permission signal to the ON state) to control the firing permission state.

Next, a game start command (BA77H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S037). When the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, it performs an initial operation (initializing operation) when the power is turned on for the movable body accessory such as the clock accessory 80 or the flower accessory 90. Then, when a series of power-on processing (S011 to S038: pre-game start processing at power-on) is completed, the processing shifts to a game processing related to normal game progress (loop processing of steps S038 to S041). The game will be controlled so that the game can proceed.

Next, with the CPU set to the interrupt disabled state (step S038), various random number update processing is executed (step S039). In the various random number update processing, various software random numbers used in the special symbol variable display game and the normal symbol variable display game (random numbers circulating a predetermined numerical range by the increment process) are updated. For example, a random number for special symbol determination used in the symbol lottery, a random number related to the lottery per auxiliary (a random number for auxiliary hit determination used in the winning lottery per auxiliary, a normal symbol determination used in the symbol lottery per auxiliary Random number (random number) used to change the initial value (start random number) (special symbol judgment initial value random number, auxiliary hit judgment initial value random number, etc.), fluctuation pattern random number used to select the fluctuation pattern, etc. Update.

When the various random number update processing (step S039) is completed, then performance display monitor total division processing is executed (step S040). In this performance display monitor total division processing, base value calculation processing for displaying on the performance display 99 is executed.

As described above, the program and the storage area for the processing related to performance display are stored in the out-of-area memory (second memory area) different from the in-area memory (first memory area) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progress. It is prescribed. Therefore, the CPU 201 first saves the stack pointer on the in-area memory side and sets the stack pointer on the out-of-area memory side.

Next, after the out-of-area RAM check process shown in FIG. 30A described later is executed, it is obtained during the performance display monitor process during the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 (see step S101 described later and step S828 in FIG. 28). , Middle starting opening sensor 34a, right starting opening sensor 33a, lower right starting opening sensor 35a, upper special winning opening sensor 42a, lower special winning opening sensor 52a, general winning opening sensor 43a, based on each input data of OUT monitoring switch 49a , Check whether or not there is a prize at each winning opening and whether or not a game ball is discharged.

When the current gaming state is the normal state, if the winning is confirmed in one of the winning openings, the number of prize balls of the winning opening that has won the prize is added to the number of payouts at the normal time (in the normal status. Prize ball addition processing), the normal out number and the total state out number are incremented by 1 (out ball number addition processing), and the current count values are updated. However, when the winning is not confirmed and the input to the OUT monitor switch 49a is confirmed, 1 is added only to the normal out number and the total state out number, and these count values are updated (the normal state out ball). Number addition process). On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal state (either the probability changing state, the time saving state, or the latent probability state), even if the winning is confirmed at any of the winning openings, Without adding the number of prize balls, only +1 is added to the total number of out-of-states, and even when the winning is not confirmed and the input to the OUT monitor switch 49a is confirmed, 1 is added to only the total number of out-states ( Out-of-balls addition process during non-normal conditions).

Then, the base value is calculated based on the updated normal-time payout number and the normal-time out number, that is, the latest normal-time payout number and the normal-time out number, and the value is stored in the measurement information storage area of the RAM 203. .. It should be noted that whether or not it is in the normal state is determined by whether or not a later-described normal state determination flag (see steps S827 to S828 in the performance display monitor process of FIG. 28) is in the ON state (5AH). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state number YJ managed by the RAM in the area may be directly obtained, and the current game state may be determined by the value of YJ.

The "big hit game" here is basically the same "low probability/no electric support" as the normal state, but since it is a game state different from the normal state, in measuring the base value, The number of prize balls of the special winning opening 40 is excluded from the counting target (the detection information of the upper special winning opening sensor 42a is excluded from the measuring target). On the other hand, the normal state also includes a small hit game. This is because there is no internal game state transition control when the small hit is won, and the gaming state during the small hit game is the same as the gaming state at the time of winning. Therefore, if the current gaming state is the normal state, the normal state is maintained during the small hit game, and the number of prize balls of the lower special winning opening 50 in the normal state is included in the base value counting target (lower large winning prize). The detection information of the mouth sensor 52a is not excluded from the measurement target). In the case of the present embodiment, the big winning openings to be opened are different for the big hit and the small hit, but for example, when using a common big winning opening (for example, one big winning opening is used). In the case), in order to exclude the winning to the special winning opening during the big hit game, it is only necessary to judge whether or not the normal state is in accordance with the operation of the condition device. Specifically, if the condition device is operating, even if the winning at the special winning opening is confirmed, it is excluded from the counting target, and if the condition device is not operating (normal state and small hit When it is confirmed that a prize has been won in the special winning opening during the game, the number of prize balls may be added to the normal payout amount.

Also, from the initial power-on or the time when all RAM outside the area is cleared, until the total number of out-of-states reaches a predetermined number (for example, 299), only the total number of out-of-states is counted as a test interval, and the base value, Does not measure. This is the operation test when the game machine is first installed in the pachinko hall. For example, the player may check the operation by putting a game ball in the starting opening and make a trial hit. This is because the award ball and the out ball due to are excluded from the measurement target. Therefore, the first (first) measurement starts after the end of the test section.

In addition, when the total number of out-of-states reaches a predetermined specified number (here, 60000) after the first (first) measurement is started, the base value (first base value) at this point is displayed on the performance of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the storage area, and for the second measurement, the current normal-time payout number, normal-time out number, and all-state out number are each cleared to zero (measurement data initialization process). That is, each time the specified number of 60000 is counted, the current base value is stored, and the normal-time payout number, the normal-time out number, and the total state-out number during measurement are stored for the next base value measurement. Clear to zero.

(Specific example of display mode of performance indicator 99)
A specific example of the display mode of the performance indicator 99 will be described. For example, when the total number of out-of-states reaches 60,000 and the current base value is '35', when displaying the real-time base value, 4-digit character information (identification display unit (identification segment) + "BL.00" is displayed as the base display part (ratio segment) (the base value becomes 0 here because of zero clearing by the above-mentioned measurement data initialization processing), and when displaying the history base value, "bL.00" is displayed. "b6.35" is lit up and displayed.

(During the test section)
During the test section, in order to inform that the current measurement is the test section, when displaying the real-time base value, “bL.” blinks on the identification display section and “bL.” is displayed on the base display section. "--" is lit up. When the history base value is displayed, "b6." is blinked on the identification display section and "---" is lit on the base display section.

(At the time of first measurement: N=1)
Since the history base value is not saved at the first measurement, "bL.**"('**' is the base value currently being measured) is displayed when the real time base value is displayed. When displaying the history base value, "b6.---" is displayed. However, the identification display portion "b6." is designed to blink so as to notify that it is the time of the first measurement.

(At the time of measurement after the next time: N≧2)
Further, for the measurement after the next time (N≧2), it is a measurement section in which the real-time base value has a variation until the total number of out-of-states reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6000) after zero-clearing for the next measurement. When displaying the real-time base value, “bL.” is displayed blinking on the identification display section, and the real-time base value is lit on the base display section as it is. When the history base value is displayed, "b6.**"('**' is the previous base value) is displayed. However, at the first time (N=1), since the history base value is not saved, when displaying the history base value, “b6.−−” is displayed, but “b6.” in the identification display portion is displayed. Is designed to blink.

When the performance display monitor total division process (step S041) is finished, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S042), the process returns to step S039, and then the processes of steps S039 to S042 are repeated (main loop process). .. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processing and performance display monitor aggregation/division processing except during execution of the timer interrupt processing which is intermittently executed.

(10-1. Initial setting process: FIG. 9)
Next, the initial setting process (step S011) in FIG. 8A will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the initial setting process.

In FIG. 9, when a system reset or a WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 first sets itself to the interrupt disabled state (step S043) and sets the stack pointer (step S044) as initial settings at startup. Next, in preparation for use of the stack in the first power supply abnormality check processing, the protect and prohibition areas of the RAM are invalidated (S045). The RAM protect is a function of preventing rewriting of the RAM due to malfunction or erroneous operation. The operation of RAM protection is as follows. After the system reset or the WDT reset occurs, the RAM protection is valid (RAM protection state). When the RAM protection is set to be valid, the data can be read from the RAM, but the data cannot be written to the RAM. Therefore, when writing data to the RAM, it is necessary to disable the RAM protection. Further, when the prohibited area is valid, if an address range set in advance (for example, a program related to setting change of setting value) is accessed, it is determined that the area other than the designated area is accessed and the IAT generation signal is output from the IAT circuit. Is output and the IAT reset is generated (traveling prohibition function outside designated area (IAT function)), but if the setting of the prohibited area is invalidated, this IAT reset does not occur. When the IAT reset occurs, only the CPU core is reset and the internal functions are not reset, but when the system reset or the WDT reset occurs, all the internal functions including the CPU core are reset. That is, even if an IAT reset occurs, the RAM is not protected, and the CTC and WDT are not initialized, but if a system reset or a WDT reset occurs, the RAM is protected (the RAM is protected). It is set, and CTC and WDT are initialized. However, the contents stored in the RAM do not change even if any of the system reset, the WDT reset, and the IAT reset is performed. It should be noted that when an IAT reset occurs, the system reset may be performed as if an unauthorized program was executed.

Next, in consideration of the possibility that the power is turned off/on during the setting change process described later, the security signal output from the frame external terminal board 21 is turned off, and the set value to the setting display 97 is set. In order to clear the display data concerning the display and prevent the careless emission control signal (emission permission signal) from being output, the emission permission signal is also set to the OFF state (step 046).

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (FIG. 10A) is executed (step S047). This first power supply abnormality check process is the same process as step S019 already described.

Next, various initial setting processes are executed (step S048). Here, a setting process for initializing register values inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, an interrupt mode setting process for setting a predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), an interrupt priority setting process, an internal hard random number It executes various setting processes when the power is turned on, such as the internal hard random number setting process that activates the circuit.

Next, the activation waiting time of the sub control board (effect control unit 24) is set (step S049). Until the sub-board activation waiting time elapses (step S052:=0), the sub-board activation waiting time subtraction process (sub-board activation waiting time-1) (step S050) and the first power supply abnormality check process (step S051). ) Is repeatedly executed (step S052:≠0). The activation of the effect control unit 24 is completed when the sub-board activation waiting time elapses.

When the sub-board activation waiting time has elapsed (step S052:=0), a standby screen display command (BA01H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S053). When the effect control unit 24 receives the standby screen display command, the effect means is used to cause the power-on standby effect to appear. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is caused to display an effect image such as “Pleased Wait”.

Next, while executing the first power supply abnormality check process (step S054), it waits for a power-on signal from the payout control board 29 to be sent (steps S054 to S055). The power-on signal is a signal that is output when the payout control board 29 has normally started up, and the CPU 201 waits until the payout control board 29 normally starts. As a result, when the payout control board 29 is not functioning normally due to some trouble, the game operation is not started only by repeating the processing of steps S054 to S055. When the power-on signal is confirmed (step S055: ON), this initial setting process is exited and the process of step S012 of the main control side main process of FIG. 8A is executed.

(10-3. Setting change process: FIG. 11)
Next, the setting change process (step S024) in FIG. 8A will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change process. This process is a process that is executed when the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door opening sensor 61 are all in the ON setting setting transition state (W (1, 1, 1)). ..

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first executes an input data creation process (step S901). In this input data creation processing, the input information of the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, the setting key switch 95, etc. is acquired, and is called from the input data creation processing in the timer interrupt processing (S082 in FIG. 13), for example. It is like this.

Next, the setting value Nc (current setting value data) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203 is acquired (in the present embodiment, the value of the setting value data is acquired in a predetermined register as the setting work value). Then, it is determined whether or not the set value Nc is a normal value (any one of 00H to 05H) (step S903). When the acquired set value Nc is not any of 00H to 05H (not a normal value), that is, when the acquired set value Nc does not correspond to any of the set values 1 to 6 (step S903: NO). Assuming that the setting value data is abnormal (RAM abnormality), the setting value data is initialized (step S904). Here, 00H (setting 1) corresponding to setting 1 is set to the setting value Nc (setting work value) (setting value Nc←00H).

When the set value Nc is a normal value (step S903: YES), or after the initialization process (set value Nc←00H) is performed on the set value data of step S904, then, as shown in FIG. The first power supply abnormality check process is executed (step S905).

Next, a security signal is output from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S906), and subsequently, a chattering prevention waiting time (for example, about 0.12 ms) is set (step S907). Then, while the subtraction processing of the chattering prevention waiting time is executed (step S908), it waits for the chattering prevention waiting time to elapse (step S909: NO). In the setting change processing of the present embodiment, the processing of steps S905 to S916 is repeated at high speed until the setting completion change switch 96 is turned off (step S916: YES), and whether or not there is a setting change operation each time, that is, It is determined whether or not the setting change switch 95 has changed from OFF to ON. By providing the chattering prevention waiting time in steps S907 to S909, erroneous detection due to chattering of the setting change switch 95 can be prevented. ..

If the chattering prevention waiting time becomes 0 (step S909: YES), the input data creation process is executed (step S910), and whether or not the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state, that is, whether or not there is a setting change operation. Is determined (step S911). In the present embodiment, when the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 is detected, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed. In this embodiment, the input data creation process for acquiring the input information of the setting change switch 95 is executed not only in step S910 immediately before step S911 but also in step S901 when the setting change process is started. This is because even if the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 suddenly rises when the setting change process is started while the setting change switch 95 is still being pressed, it is detected as empty in step S910. This is to prevent the determination process of step S911 from being affected.

If the setting change switch 95 is not in the ON state (step S911: NO), it is determined that the setting change operation has not been performed, and the process proceeds to step S915. On the other hand, when the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state (step S911: NO), it is determined that there is a setting change operation, and the current setting value Nc is changed (updated) (step S912). As described above, the set value at the time of changing operation is switched so as to circulate within the range of settings 1 to 6 every time the setting changing switch 95 is operated. Then, when the process of step S912 is completed, it is determined again whether or not the set value data is a normal value (step S913), and if it is not a normal value (step S913: NO), the set value Nc is set to 1 00H (setting 1) corresponding to is set (setting value Nc←00H) (step S914).

Next, based on the current set value Nc, setting display data to be displayed on the setting display 97 is created and output (step S915). As a result, the setting display unit 97 displays the current set value during the setting change operation. The setting value displayed during the setting change operation is not the setting information at that time (the value of the setting value data in the setting value storage area) but the provisional setting value before the setting is determined.

When the process of step S915 ends, it is determined whether the setting change completion switch 96 is in the ON state, that is, whether the setting change operation is completed (step S916). If the setting change completion switch 96 is not in the ON state (step S916: NO), it is determined that the setting change operation has not been completed, and the process proceeds to step S905, and thereafter, the step S905 is performed until the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on. ~ The process of step S916 is repeatedly executed.

When the setting change completion switch 96 is in the ON state (step S916: YES), the current setting value Nc (setting work value held in the register) is saved in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203, assuming that the setting value has been confirmed. At the same time (step S917), the set value confirmation display process is executed (step S918). In this set value confirmation display process, the current setting display data is cleared and the setting confirmation LED lighting display data is output. In the setting confirmation LED of the present embodiment, the DP section (decimal point) of the setting display unit 97, which is a 7-segment LED, plays its function, and when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on, the set value being displayed disappears. , DP section lights up, and it is notified that the set value has been confirmed.

Next, the backup flag BF is cleared (step S919), the output of the security signal is stopped (step S920), and the setting change completion command (BA09H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S921). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting change completion command, the setting change effect being executed is ended, and the setting change completion effect is executed for a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds). For example, all the decoration lamps 45 are turned on in red, a setting change completion sound (a voice such as "the setting has been changed") is output from the speaker 16, and "the setting has been changed" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Display the effect image (setting change completion screen). When the setting change operation is performed, the area RAM clearing process (step S021 in FIG. 8A) is executed. Therefore, instead of the setting change completion effect, an error notification (RAM clear notification effect) corresponding to the RAM clear is issued. You can go. For example, the setting change completion effect may be the same effect mode as the RAM clear notification effect (error notification mode when the in-area RAM clear process of step S028 is performed). Further, the RAM clear notification effect and the setting change completion effect may be performed redundantly. For example, on the liquid crystal display device 36, it is possible to simultaneously display a display such as "setting changed" and "RAM is being cleared".

Then, it waits until the setting key switch 94 is turned off (step S922: NO), and if the OFF state of the setting key switch 94 is confirmed (step S922: YES), the setting confirmation LED (DP section) is turned off. , Exit the setting change process. This completes a series of setting change operations. In the present embodiment, the setting change completion effect is displayed for a predetermined time (30 seconds) regardless of whether the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state. After that, the process returns to the main process on the main control side of FIG. 8A, and the customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S023).

After the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the front frame 2 is simply opened. Therefore, when the door opening error is configured to be notified in the process at power-on (at least before entering the loop process of S038 to S041), the door opening error is notified (for example, after the setting change completion effect is finished). , The decoration lamp 45 all flashes red, and the speaker 16 outputs a door open alarm sound). This is because it is preferable to notify the setting change completion effect preferentially over the door opening error in order to notify that the new setting value has been selected and determined (including overwriting to the same setting value). .. Since the setting change completion effect is to notify that the setting change operation has been completed (the setting value has been changed), an effect different from these is not to be confused with the door opening error notification or the setting change effect. It is preferable to adopt a mode (notification mode).

By the way, after the setting change operation is completed, the customer waiting command is transmitted following the setting change completion command (step S921, step S023 of FIG. 8A), but the effect control unit 24 ends the setting change completion effect. The customer waiting standby production (customer waiting demo screen, etc.) is not executed until this is done. In the case of the present embodiment, after the setting change completion effect is finished, a normal screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a background image of the normal effect mode corresponding to the normal state is displayed, and the decorative pattern is When a specific symbol combination (for example, "7", "3", "1") is displayed.), from this display state, the game has not been started without winning a prize in the starting opening, and a predetermined time has elapsed (For example, after 180 seconds have passed), the customer waiting standby effect (customer waiting demo screen) is executed.

Although the dedicated setting change switch 95 is provided in this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98 may be configured to be usable as the setting change switch. Further, in the present embodiment, the dedicated setting change completion switch 96 is provided, but the setting key switch 94 may be configured to be usable as a setting change completion switch. In this case, the process of step S922 does not have to be provided, which leads to a reduction in control load. Further, a sensor that detects the game ball (for example, the sensor 33a, 34a. 35a, 42a, 52a, 43a, or 49a) may function as a setting change completion switch. In this case, in the determination process of step S916, it may be determined that the set value has been determined by the fact that the sensor detects the game ball (ON state) by, for example, caring for the game ball in the winning opening. ..

(10-4. Setting confirmation process: FIG. 12)
Next, the setting confirmation process (step S026) in FIG. 8B will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change process. This process is a process executed when the setting key switch 94 of the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 is in the ON confirmation setting transition state (W (1, 0)).

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first transmits a setting confirmation command (E021H) to the effect control unit 24. When the production control unit 24 receives the setting confirmation command, the production means is used to execute the setting confirmation production (step S931). For example, an effect image such as "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. By the way, when confirming the set value, first, the front frame 2 is opened, and then the setting key switch 94 is turned on (ON state). In the case where the door opening error can be notified here, the door opening error notification occurs prior to the setting confirmation effect. On the other hand, when the confirmation of the set value is finished, the setting key switch 94 is turned off (OFF state) first, and then the front frame 2 is closed (even if the confirmation of the setting is completed, the front frame is closed). Until 2 is closed, a door open error has occurred). In other words, from the start of the confirmation of the set value to the completion of the confirmation, the door opening error has occurred in any case. Therefore, the notification priority of the setting confirmation effect is set higher than that of the door opening error notification, only the setting confirmation effect is displayed while the setting key switch 94 is in the ON state, and again after the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state. , A door open error may appear. Of course, in order to clarify the door opening error and the setting confirmation work, the fact that the setting confirmation is being performed and the fact that the door is being opened may be redundantly notified.

Next, the setting value data is acquired from the setting value storage area of the RAM 203 (step S932).

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (FIG. 10A) is executed (step S933), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 94 is in the ON state (step S934). If the setting key switch 94 is in the ON state, the setting is being confirmed. In this case (step S934: YES), a security signal is output (step S935), setting value data is acquired from the setting value storage area of the RAM 203, and setting display data is created based on the setting value data (step S935). (S936), the setting display data is output (step S937). As a result, the current setting value (in this case, the setting value being confirmed, unlike the setting change process) is displayed on the setting display 99. After that, the processes of steps S933 to S937 are repeatedly executed until the setting key switch 94 is turned off, that is, until the setting confirmation is completed.

When the setting key switch 94 is turned off (step S934: NO), the setting display data is cleared and the setting value displayed on the setting display 99 is displayed as the setting confirmation end processing. The light is turned off (step S938), the output of the security signal is stopped (step S939), and the setting confirmation end command (E022H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S940). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting confirmation end command, the effect during setting confirmation is ended. As a result, a series of setting confirmation periods has ended.

<13. Main control timer interrupt processing: Figure 13>
Next, the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the main control side timer interrupt processing. This main control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at fixed time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during main control side main process execution.

In FIG. 13, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the second power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, as shown in FIG. 10(B), the power supply level supplied from the power supply board is monitored, and if an abnormality such as power failure occurs, the game is restored without any trouble when the power supply is restored. As possible, a backup process of storing predetermined game information at the time of power interruption in the RAM is performed. Therefore, the power supply abnormality check process functions as a backup unit. The details of the second power supply abnormality check process will be described later.

Then, a switch input data creation process is executed (step S082). Input data is created from various sensors and switches based on input information (ON/OFF signal, rising state (ON edge, OFF edge)). The detection information by the various sensors here is, for example, a winning detection switch (right starting opening sensor 33a, middle starting opening sensor 34a, lower right starting opening sensor 35a, normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, upper winning opening sensor 42a, ON/OFF information (winning detection information) of switch signals output from the lower major winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, the OUT monitoring switch 49a, the winning combination gate sensor 57a, etc., and a switch related to the setting change operation. ON/OFF information (operation information) of switch signals output from the setting key switch 94, the setting change switch 95, the setting change completion switch 96, and the like, and a status signal from the payout control board 29 (the door opening sensor 61 and the full state). (ON/OFF information of the detection sensor 60) and the like.

Then, an error management process is executed (step S083). In this error management processing, whether or not an error has occurred is monitored based on input data relating to various sensors and a status signal from the payout control board 29, and when an error has occurred, error processing according to the error type is performed. To execute. The error processing includes sending an error command according to the error type, sending an error cancel command when the error is resolved, and the like. When the production control unit 24 receives the error command, the production control unit 24 executes the error notification according to the error type, and when the production control unit 24 receives the error release command, the error notification being executed is ended.

Next, a timer management process for managing the timer used for game operation control is executed (step S084). Timer values of various timers (for example, a special symbol auditors product operation timer described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are updated (subtraction processing) here. Details of this timer management processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a random number management process within a timer interrupt that regularly updates the random number related to each variable display game is executed (step S085). Here, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, with respect to the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for auxiliary hit determination, etc. Then, the process of changing the start value of the random number counter is performed. The internal lottery random number (big hit determination random number) is generated by the random number generation circuit and is not updated here.

In the input management process of step S089, a winning counter for counting the number of winnings and an OUT ball monitoring for counting the number of out balls are provided for each winning opening based on the input data created by the switch input data creating process (step S082). Update the counter value etc.

Next, prize ball management processing is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management processing, the prize counter is checked, and if there is a prize, a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the gaming ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the command to execute the payout operation for the designated number of prize balls.

Then, a normal symbol management process is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, a process necessary for executing the normal symbol variable display game is performed. Here, it is monitored whether or not the game ball is detected by the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, and when the game ball is detected, predetermined game information necessary for the auxiliary hit lottery (random number for auxiliary hit determination etc.) Acquire (universal figure random number acquisition processing), the game information as pending data (operational holding sphere for ordinary symbols (universal drawing operation pending sphere)), hold and store the maximum number of holding balls up to the upper limit (universal figure holding storage processing) .. Then, when the predetermined variable display start condition for the universal figure is satisfied, the auxiliary winning lottery based on the universal operation pending ball is performed, and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol based on the auxiliary winning lottery result is selected and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. (Normal stop pattern) is determined. In addition, here, in order to normally display the variable display operation, the LED display data for the variable display is created if it is changing, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not changing (normal Symbol display data update process).

Then, a normal electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this normal electric auditors product management processing, processing necessary for executing the ordinary electric opening game is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the auxiliary win lottery is a win, the setting process of the solenoid control data for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c is performed. On the basis of the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c in the solenoid management processing of step S100 described later, and thereby the opening/closing operation pattern of the movable piece 47 is controlled. To be done.

Next, special symbol management processes 1 and 2 are executed (steps S093 and S094). In the special symbol management processes 1 and 2, mainly, processes necessary for executing the special symbol variable display game are performed. Details of this special symbol management processing 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, and details of the special symbol management processing 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the special electric auditors product management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric auditors product management processing, processing necessary for controlling execution of the winning game is performed. Specifically, when the big hit lottery result is a big hit 1 to 8 or a small hit, a hit game (a big hit game or a small hit game) corresponding to the hit type that is won is executed and controlled. In the case of a big hit, the start process of the round game based on the detection signal of the combination gate sensor 57a, the execution control of the round game, the transition control of the game state after the big hit game is included, and the like.

Further, here, a plurality of types of effect control commands are transmitted according to the progress of the winning game. In the case of a big hit, the "big hit start command" is started at the start of the big hit game, and the "round start" is started at the start of the round game (when the game ball passes to the winning combination gate 57 in the first R and when the special winning opening is opened in the second R and thereafter). "Command", "round end command" at the end of each round game (when the big winning opening is closed), "big hit end command" at the end of the specified number of rounds (at the end of the final round game), and "at the big winning opening" The “special winning opening winning command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. In the case of a small hit, the "small hit start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 at the start of the small hit game, and the "small hit end command" is sent at the end of the small hit game. Upon receiving these commands, the effect control unit 24 controls the appearance of the intended effect (hit effect) according to the progress of the winning game.

For example, the above-mentioned big hit start command includes information on the hit type of this time and the gaming state at the time of winning, and on the side of the effect control unit 24, depending on the front big hit, the back big hit, and the big hit type of this time, It is used when deciding a series of mid-hit production scenarios developed during a big hit game. In addition, the round start command includes current round number information, and is used when the effect corresponding to the number of rounds is presented on the effect control unit 24 side. In addition, the big hit end command includes information on the hit type of this time and the game state at the time of winning, and the ending control is started on the side of the effect control unit 24, and the game state after the end of the hit game is specified. It is used when determining the effect mode after the hit game.

When the big hit game ends (in the present embodiment, when the ending effect period ends (the same applies to the small hit game)), the condition device operation flag, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, the continuous number counter (the number of rounds is set). The counter for counting), the special symbol stop 1 flag, etc. are cleared. When the small hit game is over, the small hit mid-flag and the special symbol stop 2 flag described later are cleared.

Next, right-handed notification information management processing is executed (step S097). In this right-handing notification information management process, an LED for turning on the right-handing display device 39b when the gaming state is “right-handed advantage” (hit game, latent probability state, time saving state, probability changing state) When the data is created and the gaming state is "left-handed advantage" (normal state), LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created.

Next, the LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management processing, output control of the control signal (dynamic lighting data) to the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the composite display device 38c, and the right-handed display device 39b is performed. A control signal based on the LED display data created by the above-mentioned normal symbol management process (step S091) or special symbol management process (step S093) is output by this LED management process. As a result, a series of variable display operations (variable display and stop display) of special symbols and normal symbols are realized.

Next, external terminal management processing is performed (step S099). In this external terminal management processing, various external end signals including a big hit mid-range signal, a big hit mid-range big hit signal, and the like are created through the frame external terminal board 21, and the external counter devices such as the data counter DT and the hall computer HC are created. The output is controlled.

Next, solenoid management processing is performed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, based on the solenoid control data set in the normal electric auditors product management process (step S092) or the special electric auditors product management process (step S094), the normal electric auditors product solenoid 41c and the special winning opening solenoid 42c, The output control of the excitation signal to 52c and the like is performed. This realizes the opening/closing operation of the movable piece 47 and the special winning openings 40, 50.

Next, performance display monitor processing is executed (step S101). In this performance display monitor processing, processing necessary for displaying performance information on the performance display 99 is performed. Details of the performance display monitor process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the count value of WDT is cleared (step S102). As a result, the WDT is reset and the count value is returned to the initial value.

After the processing of steps S081 to S102 described above is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S103). As a result, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interrupt, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<10B. Second power supply abnormality check process: FIG. 10B>
Next, the second power supply abnormality check process (step S081) in FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 10B. FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the second power supply abnormality check processing.

In FIG. 13B, the CPU 201 first acquires a power supply abnormality signal (voltage drop signal) supplied from a power supply board (not shown) through an input port (not shown) (step S951). Then, it is determined whether or not the levels of the power supply abnormality signal continuously match twice (step S952), and the processes of steps S951 to S952 are repeated until they match (step S952: NO). When the levels of the power supply abnormality signal match (step S952: YES), it is determined whether the power supply abnormality signal is at the abnormal level (step S953).

When the power supply abnormality signal is not at the abnormal level (step S953: NO), the backup flag BF is cleared (step S956), the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (step S957), and the second power supply abnormality check processing is exited.

On the other hand, when the power supply abnormality signal is at the abnormal level (step S953: YES), 1 is added to the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (step S954), and whether the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter after addition has reached the upper limit value Y? It is determined whether or not (step S955). This considers that the acquired data from the input port may be garbled due to the influence of noise, etc., and the acquired data continuously maintains the abnormal level and the upper limit value Y (for example, , Y=2), it is determined that the AC power supply is actually cut off.

When the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter has reached the upper limit value Y (step S955: YES), it is determined that a power supply abnormality has occurred and backup processing is performed. Specifically, the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared to zero (step S958), the firing control signal is set to the OFF state (step S959), and the backup flag BF is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S960). Then, a power-off command indicating that a power failure has occurred is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S961). The power-off command is composed of a power-off A command and a power-off B command each having a 16-bit length, and is sequentially transmitted every 8 bits in this order. The reason for adopting such a configuration is to prevent erroneous notification of the power disconnection status to other control units due to the influence of noise or the like.

Next, the RAM protect is set valid and the prohibited area is set invalid (step S962), and the output data of all output ports are cleared (step S963). As a result, data writing to the RAM is prohibited in the subsequent processing. This prevents the RAM from being rewritten abnormally due to the reading of an illegal address of the RAM due to the voltage drop, and causes the payout control board 29 to start the power supply abnormality check processing of the same type later than the main control unit 20. On the other hand, unreasonable data can be prevented from being transmitted. After the above backup processing is completed, the generation of the interrupt signal is prohibited by the setting processing for the CTC and the CPU is set to the interrupt prohibition (step S964), and the power supply voltage drops while repeating the infinite loop processing. Wait for the CPU to become inactive.

<14. Timer management processing: FIG. 14>
Next, the timer management process (step S084) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the timer management process.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first performs a 2-byte timer subtraction process (timer update process) (step S531).

In the present embodiment, as a 2-byte timer, a normal symbol electric auditors product operation timer that manages the normal fluctuation winning device 41 (movable piece 47) operation time, an ordinary symbol electric auditors product operation timer for type testing (ordinary electric for test signal) Characters in operation timer), special symbol 1 operation timer 2 that manages the fixed display time of special symbol 1, special symbol 2 operation timer 2 that manages the fixed display time of special symbol 2, special variation winning devices 42, 52 (open) It handles a special electric auditors product operation timer that manages the operation time of the doors 42b, 52b), an error timer that manages a predetermined error notification time, and the like. Here, it is checked whether or not the timer values of these 2-byte timers are zero, and if there is a timer that is not zero, the timer value is decremented by one.

Next, the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is acquired (step S532). This "special symbol 2 operation timer 1" is a timer that manages the variation time of the special symbol 2, and is composed of 3 bytes (3 byte timer). As a timer having the same 3-byte structure as the special symbol 2 operation timer 1, "special symbol 1 operation timer 1" for managing the variation time of the special symbol 1 is provided. In this embodiment, as a variation pattern related to a special symbol that cannot be measured by the 2-byte timer, an ultra-long variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds (600,000 ms) is adopted. Therefore, a 3-byte timer is used as a timer for managing the variation time of the special symbol. The variation time is set in step SS457 during the special symbol variation pattern creation process of FIG. 22 (step S417 during the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 18) described later.

Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is zero (step S533). If the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is zero (step S533:=0), the process proceeds to step S535. If the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is not zero (step S533:≠0), the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is subtracted by 1 (step S534).

(Special figure 2 Special figure 1 variation time measurement interruption process at the time of winning the small hit: S535 to S538)
Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S535). The "special symbol stop 2 flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the special symbol is "small hit symbol stop and small hit game", and the flag is ON (=5AH). In the case, it indicates that "small hitting symbol stop and small hitting game is in progress", and when the flag is OFF (=00H), it indicates that it is not "small hitting symbol stop and small hit game in playing" (For example, see steps S483 to S484 in FIG. 24 described later). Here, in the ON state period of the special symbol stop 2 flag, after the variable time of the special symbol ends and the symbol display mode corresponding to the small hit (small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, the fixed display time (500 ms) is set. After that, it refers to the period until the small hit game ends. The special symbol stop 2 flag is cleared at the end of the small hit game in the special electric auditors product management process (step S095) ((special symbol stop 2 flag←00H). However, the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the OFF state. However, until the fluctuation display of the special symbol is newly started, the small hit symbol is still stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, but in this case, the special symbol stop 2 flag is OFF. Because it is a state, it will be treated as a small hit symbol non-stop.In this way, the ON/OFF state of the special symbol stop 2 flag is the fixed display time (500ms after the end of the fluctuation time) to the small hit game. In terms of whether it is during the game period or not, it is referred to as “small hit symbol stop and small hit game in.” Below, small hit symbol stop and small hit game is abbreviated as “small hit symbol stop”. In the case of the present embodiment, the small hit is the big hit lottery target type only on the special figure 2 side (see FIG. 4), but the same applies when the small hit is provided on the special figure 1 side as well.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the special symbol stop 2 flag described above, the "special symbol stop 1 flag" is treated as a flag for designating whether or not it is a big hit. It is a flag for designating whether or not the special symbol is "big hit symbol stop and big hit game in progress", and if the flag is in ON state (=5AH), "big hit symbol stop and big hit game in progress" It indicates that there is, and when the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), it indicates that it is not “big hit symbol stop and big hit game” (for example, see steps S493 to S494 in FIG. 25 described later). Here, in the ON state period of the special symbol stop 1 flag, after the variable time of the special symbol ends and the symbol display mode (big hit symbol) corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed, after the fixed display time (500 ms), It refers to the period until the big hit game ends. Like the "special symbol stop 2 flag" described above, this "special symbol stop 1 flag" is also cleared at the end of the jackpot game in the special electric auditors product management process (step S095) (after completion of the round game of the specified number of rounds). , Cleared at the end of the ending effect time: special symbol stop 1 flag ← 00H). However, even if the special symbol stop 1 flag is turned off, until the variable display of the special symbol is newly started, the big hit symbol is still displayed on the special symbol display device. However, in this case, since the special symbol stop 1 flag is in the OFF state, it is treated as a big hit symbol non-stop. In this way, the ON/OFF state of the special symbol stop 1 flag is referred to as “big hit symbol stop and big hit game” in terms of whether it is the fixed display time to the game period during the big hit game. In the following, the big hit symbol stopped and the big hit game is abbreviated as "big hit symbol stopped".

If the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S535:=5AH), the timer management process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol stop 2 flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S535: ≠5AH), the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is acquired (step S536), and the acquired special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is zero. It is determined whether or not (step S537). As described above, the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is a 3-byte timer that manages the variable time of the special symbol 1.

If the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is zero (step S537:=0), exit the timer management process without doing anything. If the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is not zero (step S537:≠0), the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is decremented by 1 and the timer value is updated (step S538), and the timer management process is exited.

In the present embodiment, in the determination process of step S535, when the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S535:=5AH), that is, in the case of a small hit, the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 The timer management process can be exited without performing the timer subtraction process for. Therefore, during the period in which the ON state of the special symbol stop 2 flag is maintained, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is suspended, and the variable display state is maintained without the special figure 1 being stopped and displayed (while the measurement is suspended). , Will be treated as'variable display'). As a result, we have realized a simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, which is a “measurement interruption type during small hit”. In the present embodiment, if one special symbol is a big hit, the other special symbol will be stopped and displayed with a forced loss symbol, so that a special symbol 1 operation timer 1 or a special symbol 2 operation timer during the big hit game. No timer subtraction (update) process for 1 is provided.

<15. Special symbol management process 1: Figure 15>
Next, the special symbol management process 1 (step S093) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process 1.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the processing contents of the special symbol management process 1, first, special symbol operation confirmation data in the figure, special symbol operation status (special symbol 1 operation status, special symbol 2 operation status) I will explain.

The "special symbol operation confirmation data" is data that specifies the special symbol type to be processed in each of the special symbol management processes 1 and 2 (steps S093, S094), and the special symbol operation confirmation data is " When it is zero (00H), "special drawing 1" is designated as a processing target, and when the special symbol operation confirmation data is "1 (01H)", "special drawing 2" is designated as a processing target. .. The value of the special symbol operation confirmation data is changed to 00H and 01H according to the processing state (see step S301 and step S306).

What is "special symbol operation status"? It is a status value that specifies the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state. In this embodiment, "special symbol 1 operation status" showing the behavior of special figure 1 and "special symbol 2 operation status" showing the behavior of special figure 2 are provided. In the special symbol operation status, four status values of “waiting for customer (00H)”, “waiting (01H)”, “changing (02H)”, and “deciding (03H)” as status values indicating the behavior of the special symbol Is prepared. The "waiting for customers (00H)" and "waiting (01H)" means that the behavior of the special symbol is a standby state for the next change, and "being changed" changes the behavior of the special symbol (fluctuation). The display is in progress, and the above-mentioned “during confirmation” means that the change of the special symbol ends and the stop (decision) is being displayed (during special symbol confirmation time).

Here (α) processing of step S304 and step S309 (processing during special symbol fluctuation), (β) processing of step S305 and step S310 (processing during special symbol confirmation time), (γ) step S331 shown in FIG. 16 described later. And the process of step S334 (special symbol variation start process) is configured as a common process to reduce the control load. In the present embodiment, the special symbol operation confirmation data, the special symbol operation status, and the like are made to cooperate well, and the following control is performed regarding the variable display operation control of the special symbol.

(Processing of the first half part in FIG. 15 (processing of the special figure 1 side): Steps S301 to S305)
In the processing of steps S301 to S305 of the first half shown in FIG. 15, as the processing for realizing the variable display operation of special figure 1, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data is updated (set) to 00H and "special figure 1" is set. After designating it as a processing target (step S301), if the special symbol 1 operation status is "changing (02H)", "special symbol changing process (step S304)" is executed, and "determining (03H)" In the case of ",""processing during special symbol confirmation time (step S305)" is executed.

In the special symbol management process 2 shown in FIG. 16 to be described later, if the fluctuation start permissible condition is satisfied, the special symbol operation confirmation data is updated to 00H, and after "special diagram 1" is designated as a processing target (step S329). If the special symbol 1 operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)", the "special symbol variation start process (step S331)" in the special symbol management process 2 shown in the figure is executed.

(Processing of the latter half part (processing of the special figure 2 side): Steps S306 to S310)
In the processing of steps S306 to S310 in the latter half of FIG. 15, as processing for realizing the variable display operation of special figure 2, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data is updated to 01H and "special figure 2" is processed. After designating (step S306), if the special symbol 2 operation status is "changing (02H)", "special symbol changing process (step S309)" is executed, and "decision is in progress (03H)". In this case, the "special symbol confirmation time process (step S310)" is executed. Then, the special symbol management process 1 is exited, and the process proceeds to the special symbol management process 2 of step S094 of FIG.

Further, in the special symbol management process 2 shown in FIG. 16 described later, if the fluctuation start allowable condition is satisfied, after updating the special symbol operation confirmation data to 01H and designating "special diagram 2" as a processing target (step S332). If the special symbol 2 operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)", the "special symbol variation start process (step S334)" in the special symbol management process 2 shown in the figure is executed.

Note that FIG. 18 is used for details of the special symbol variation start process (steps S331, S334), and FIGS. 23 to 25 are used for details of the special symbol variation process (steps S304, S309). Special symbol confirmation time Details of the middle processing (steps S305 and S310) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26A to 26B.

<16. Special symbol management processing 2: FIG. 16>
Next, the special symbol management process 2 (step S094) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process 2. This special symbol management process 2 is mainly a process relating to a reserved memory when a game ball is won in the starting port and a starting port checking process related to a prefetching notice (holding addition command), and a special symbol variation related to variation start of a special symbol. It is mainly composed of start processing.

In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not there is a winning at the right start opening 33 which is the special opening 1 starting opening, the middle starting opening 34 which is the special opening 1 starting opening, and the lower right starting opening 35 which is the special opening 2 starting opening. Are sequentially checked (steps S321, S323, S325).

If there is a winning in the right starting opening 33 (step S321: YES), the right starting opening check process is executed (step S322), and if there is a winning in the middle starting opening 34 (step S323: YES), the middle starting opening When the check process is executed (step S324), and there is a winning in the lower right starting opening 35 (step S325: YES), the lower right starting opening checking process is executed (step S326). Details of the "right starting opening check process" in step S322, the "middle starting opening check process" in step S324, and the step S326 "lower right starting opening check process" will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the "right starting opening check processing" of step S322 and the step S324 "middle starting opening check processing" which process the special figure 1 are common processing.

When the processing of steps S321 to S326 is completed, the ON/OFF state of the special symbol stop 1 flag and the ON/OFF state of the special symbol stop 2 flag are sequentially determined (steps S327 to S328).

When neither the special symbol stop 1 flag nor the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S327: ≠ 5AH, and S328: ≠ 5AH), that is, even if the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are small hit symbols stopped If it is not during the big hit symbol stop, the variable start permissive condition (execution condition) of the new special symbol is established, and the processing necessary to start the variable display of the special symbol in steps S329 to S334 is executed. It should be noted that steps S329 to S331 are processes for the special figure 1, and steps S332 to S334 are processes for the special figure 2.

On the other hand, if any one of the special symbol stop 1 flag and the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (step S327:=5AH, or S328:=5AH), the new special symbol fluctuation start permission condition is not satisfied. As, as for the special symbol fluctuation start processing (special symbol fluctuation start processing) is not executed, the special symbol display data update processing of step S335 which will be described later is executed, and the special symbol management processing 2 is exited.

In the present embodiment, by the processing of steps S327 to S328, when the variation time of one special symbol ends and the stop display is performed in the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol, the fixed display time starts until the winning game ends, the other. It is possible to prohibit the start of variable display of special symbols. As a result, the variable display of the other special symbol is not started during the fixed display time of the winning symbol, and the variable display operation of the other is started even though the one special symbol is stopped in the winning symbol. It is possible to reliably prevent an inappropriate display state (display operation) that is caused. After the winning game is over, the special symbol stop 1 flag or the special symbol stop 2 flag in the ON state is cleared, and the start of variable display of a new special symbol is allowed.

Then, 00H is set to the special symbol operation confirmation data (step S329), and it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)" (step S330). If the special symbol 1 operation status is "standby (00H, 01H)" (step S330: YES), the special symbol variation start process is executed (step S331), and if the special symbol 1 operation status is not on standby ( (Step S330: NO), the process proceeds to step S332. In the special symbol variation start process, the process required to start the variable display of the special symbol 1 is executed. The details of the special symbol variation management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, 01H is set to the special symbol operation confirmation data (step S332), and it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 operation status is "standby (00H or 01H)" (step S333). If the special symbol 2 operation status is waiting (00H or 01H) (step S333: YES), the special symbol variation start process is executed (step S334), and if the special symbol 2 operation status is not waiting (step S333) : NO), and proceeds to step S335. In the special symbol variation start process, the process required to start the variable display of the special symbol 2 is executed. Note that steps S331 and S334 (special symbol variation start processing) are common processing.

When the processing proceeds to the step S335, the special symbol display data updating processing is executed. In this special symbol display data update processing, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating, and if it is fluctuating, the data of the special symbol which repeats blinking every predetermined time (for example, 128 ms) (special symbol fluctuating) Data for display) is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for display during special symbol stop display) is created. A control signal based on the display data of the special symbol created here is output in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 13, and the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. .. As a result, the special symbol management process 2 is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric auditors product management process of step S095 of FIG.

<17. Starting mouth check process (lower right starting mouth check process, right starting mouth check process, middle starting mouth check process: FIG. 17>
Next, the lower right starting opening check process, the right starting opening check process, and the middle starting opening check process (steps S322, S324, and S326) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the starting opening check process. The starting opening check process serves as a winning process that is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition.

Here, the lower right starting opening check processing (step S326) is processing for the special figure 2 (symbol variable display game 2), and the right starting opening check processing (step S322) and the middle starting opening check (step S324). ) Is a process for the special figure 1 (symbol variable display game 1). However, only the special symbol types to be processed are different, and the processing contents are substantially the same. Therefore, in FIG. 17, as a representative example, the starting mouth check process (right starting mouth check process, middle starting mouth check process) for the special figure 1 will be mainly described, and the starting mouth check process for the special figure 2 will be mainly described. (Detailed description of the lower right starting opening check process) will be omitted to avoid redundant description unless otherwise necessary.

In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first updates the special symbol operation confirmation data to 00H (special symbol operation confirmation data ← 00H), specifies the processing target in the special figure 1, and then the number of operation holding balls, that is, the special figure 1 operation It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is the maximum number of reserved memories (here, the upper limit is 4) (step S351). In the lower right starting opening check process of step S322, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data is updated to 01H (special symbol operation confirmation data+1), and the processing target is designated as the special diagram 2, and then the special figure 2 operation holding ball It is determined whether the number is the maximum reserved storage number (here, the upper limit is 4). As described above, in the following, the case where the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, that is, the case where the processing target is the special figure 1 side will be described.

When the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number is the maximum reserved memory number (step S351:=MAX), the process of step S363 described later (over prize winning command transmission process) is executed to generate the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number. If is not the maximum number of reserved memories (when it is less than 4) (step S351:≠MAX), 1 is added to the special figure 1 operation reserved number of balls (step S352).

Next, various random numbers used in the special symbol variable display game 1 relating to the special figure 1 operation-holding sphere generated this time are acquired (step S353). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random value is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the variable display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and in the hold storage area, various random number values described above as hold data are specially stored. Until it is used for the variable display operation of the symbol 1 (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), it is held and stored in the order in which the starting conditions are established (the winning order). The reserved storage area is provided with a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side, that is, a special figure 1 reserved storage area and a special figure 2 reserved storage area. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of reserved memories: n=4 in this embodiment), each of which stores the reserved data for the maximum number of reserved memories. It is possible.

Next, the prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: “9FH”) that prohibits the prefetching determination (prohibits the prefetching advance notice) is acquired as the “winning command data 1” on the lower byte side (EVENT) of the hold addition command (step S354). Then, it is determined whether or not the "prefetching prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S355). The "prefetching prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting the prefetching determination for the operation-holding ball. Here, since the special figure 1 side is the processing target, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading prohibition condition (special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition) for the special figure 1 operation holding sphere is satisfied.

When the pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied (step S355: YES), the processes of steps S358 to S359 relating to the pre-reading determination are skipped, and the pre-reading determination targeting the special figure 1 operation holding ball this time is not executed, and the pre-reading determination is not performed. A pending addition command having prohibited data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (see step S360 described later). As a result, the prefetching notice effect is not executed. In other words, the prefetch prohibition data can be said to be data designating that the prefetch determination process (step S358) is not executed.

Regarding the prefetching prohibition condition, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the prefetching prohibition is based on the current game state. Specifically, in the normal state and the probability variation state where the winning frequency to the starting point of Toku-zu 1 is high and the probability change state, the pre-reading determination of the Toku-zu 2 side is prohibited, the pre-reading determination of the Toku-zu 1 side is allowed, and the Toku-zu 2 start In the case of a latent state in which the winning frequency to the mouth 35 is high, the pre-reading determination on the special figure 1 side is prohibited and the pre-reading determination on the special figure 2 side is allowed. In addition, during the time saving state and during the big hit game, the pre-reading determination of both Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is prohibited. The reason for prohibiting prefetching in the case of a time saving state is that the special pattern 1 start opening is frequently won during the time saving state, but the high speed variation pattern of the variation pattern at the time of loss is "normal variation during time saving 1s" is selected. Therefore (FIG. 35(B)), it is of little significance to generate the prefetching notice. Therefore, during the time saving state, the pre-reading determinations of both Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 are prohibited.

Returning to the explanation of step S355, if the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S355: NO), the setting abnormality check process is executed (step S356).

<27. Setting error check process: Figure 27>
For convenience of description, the setting abnormality check process will be described first. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing details of the setting abnormality check processing in step S356.

In the setting abnormality check process of FIG. 27, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (=5AH: setting abnormality error is occurring) (step S061). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S062:=5AH), the setting error check process is exited without doing anything. However, when the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S062: ≠5AH), the setting value is acquired from the setting value storage area of the RAM 203, and the setting value is a normal value (00H to 05H corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6). It is determined whether the value is any value) (step S062). This determination processing is the same as the content of the determination processing of steps S903 and S913 in the setting change processing of FIG. 11, and is common processing. When the acquired setting value is not any of 00H to 05H (step S062: NO), it is determined that an abnormality (setting value data abnormality (RAM abnormality)) has occurred in the setting value data, and the setting error flag is turned on (5AH ) Is set (step S063). Then, the set value abnormality command (0E33H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S064), and the setting abnormality check process is ended. Incidentally. When the production control unit 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, the production means is utilized to execute the setting abnormality error notification. For example, all the decoration lamps 45 are turned on in red, and a message such as "RAM abnormal, please call a staff member" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. The setting error (RAM error) can be eliminated by performing the setting changing operation as described above.

(Modification of setting error check process)
The setting abnormality check process may be executed during the main control timer interrupt process. In this case, it is preferable to execute at least before the special symbol management process of step S093. For example, it is preferable to execute it before the error management process.

When the setting abnormality check process described above is completed, it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (=5AH) (step S357). If the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S357:=5AH), it is determined that a setting value data abnormality (RAM abnormality) has occurred, and the prefetch determination processing (step S358) is not executed but the processing of step S360 described later is performed. move on. Therefore, when the set value data abnormality occurs, a pending addition command having prefetching prohibition data (EVENT: “9FH”) is created (see step S360 described later).

Although details will be described later, when the set value data error occurs in the starting opening check process (process at the time of winning), the hold addition command including the prefetch prohibition data (9FH) is transmitted without performing the RAM error process. Then, the start-up check process can be exited. When the set value data abnormality occurs, the RAM error processing is performed in the subsequent special symbol fluctuation start processing (processing at the time of fluctuation start) in FIG. 18 (see step S411 in FIG. 18).

On the other hand, if the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S357: ≠5AH), that is, if the setting value data is a normal value, the prefetch determination processing is executed (step S358). In this pre-reading determination process, the jackpot lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is pre-judged and the pre-reading variation pattern is determined based on the lottery result. Specifically, the "prefetch win determination process" to pre-determine the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation, the "prefetch symbol determination process" to pre-read the symbol lottery result at the start of fluctuation, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation A series of processes related to the pre-reading determination including the "pre-reading variation pattern determination process" for the pre-reading determination is executed.

((A) Winning jackpot random number determination process (prefetch failure determination process))
In the prefetch determination process of step S358, first, the prefetch failure determination process is executed. In the prefetch failure determination process, first, the hit random number determination table corresponding to the special symbol operation confirmation data is acquired, and then, the jackpot determination random number value acquired in the process of step S353 is acquired. Then, based on the obtained jackpot determination random number value and the hit random number determination table, the winning lottery (prefetch winning determination) for the current operation holding ball is performed. That is, the winning lottery result at the time of start of variation executed when the current operation-holding ball is subjected to the variation display operation (“big hit determination process (S413 of FIG. 18 described later)” “small hit determination process (described later) (S414) in FIG. 18))) is prefetched, and the result (prefetch failure result) is acquired.

In the hit random number determination table, a special random number determination table for special figure 1 relating to the special symbol variable display game 1 (not shown) and a special random number determination table for special symbol 2 relating to the special symbol variable display game 2 (Fig. (Not shown) is included. In this process, a random number determination table for either special figure 1 or special figure 2 is selected according to the value of the special symbol operation confirmation data. In these hit random number judgment tables, there are judgment values (winning areas corresponding to high probability and low probability) for determining distinction between big hits, small hits (only for special figure 2 in the present embodiment) and loss. It is stipulated (there is no judgment value (winning area) that wins big and small hits at the same time), and it is determined which judgment value (winning area) the big hit judgment random number value belongs to. Thus, the winning type is determined according to the current jackpot lottery probability (high probability, low probability). The jackpot lottery probability is, in other words, the operation probability of the condition device.

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a table corresponding to the set value (a table in which at least a big hit lottery probability differs depending on the set values 1 to 6). Further, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability (probability increase rate) is the same in each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the ratio is set to a value not exceeding 10. For example, in the case of setting 6 according to the hit random number determination table for special figure 1, the low probability is 1/320, the high probability is approximately 1/137, and the big hit is win. In the case of setting 5, the low probability is 1 /332, about 1/142 when there is a high probability, that is a big hit. The hit random number determination table that differs for each set value may be a common table for some of the set values. For example, a table or the like that is common to the settings 1 and 2 and has different jackpot selection probabilities for the settings 3 to 6 respectively. If you refer to the common hit random number determination table with some setting values, the profit level (ball output rate) will be the same performance, but in the symbol table described later, you can set the symbol selection rate for each hit type. Different values may have different probabilities. The hit random number determination table is also used for the process at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 18).

Here, in the present embodiment, the prefetch failure result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being stored in a predetermined general-purpose register incorporated in the CPU. This is because the result of the pre-reading hit judgment is immediately used in the subsequent pre-reading symbol judgment processing, and this data is not needed and need not be stored in the RAM.

((B) Special winning symbol creation process during winning (pre-reading symbol determination process))
In the look-ahead symbol determination process, first, a "design table (big hit design table, small hit design table, or missing design table: not shown)" according to the result of the pre-reading loss (classification of big hit, small hit, loss), and step The random number for special symbol determination acquired in the process of S353 is acquired. Next, based on the acquired symbol table and the random number for special symbol determination, a symbol lottery (pre-reading symbol determination) for the current operation holding ball is performed. That is, the look-ahead determination is made on the result of the symbol lottery at the start of the fluctuation (the result of the “special stop symbol creation process (see S415 of FIG. 18)” to be described later) performed when the operation-holding ball of this time is provided for the variable display operation. Then, the result (prefetch pattern result) is acquired.

In the above big hit symbol table, small hit symbol table, or lost symbol table, the symbol table for special figure 1 relating to special symbol variable display game 1 and the symbol for special symbol 2 relating to special symbol variable display game 2, respectively Contains a table. In each symbol table, the determination value (winning area) for determining the winning type is defined, and whether the random number for special symbol determination belongs to which determination value, the special symbol determination data and the special stop The symbol number is determined. Further, the above symbol table is also used in the special stop symbol creating process (step S415 of FIG. 18) which is the process at the start of fluctuation.

The "special symbol determination data" is data for identifying the type of winning, that is, the winning type (symbol type), and specifically, any of the big hits 1 to 8, the small hits, and the losses A to C. This is data for identifying whether or not it is done. Further, the "special stop symbol number" is data designating a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, and when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the main control unit 20 side. Used. In the present embodiment, for example, even in the case of the same "miss A", the display mode of the special stop symbols (7-segment display mode) displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a, 38b may be different (for example, , "-." in case of loss A of special figure 1, "1." in case of loss A of special figure 2, etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, since "small hit" is excluded from the big hit lottery targets on the special map 1 side (no small win), the small hit symbol table for special drawing 1 is not provided. Therefore, with regard to special figure 1, in the big hit symbol table for special figure 1, any one of big hit 1 to big hit 4 is determined by a predetermined symbol lottery rate (see FIG. 4), and is a lost symbol table for special figure 1. Is determined by a predetermined symbol lottery rate (for example, Loss A is 95%, Loss B is 4%, Loss C is 1%). Regarding special figure 2, in the big hit symbol table for special figure 2, one of big hit 5 to big hit 8 is determined by a predetermined symbol lottery rate (see FIG. 4), and in the small hit symbol table for special figure 2. The small hit is determined by 100%, and in the lost symbol table for special figure 2, the lost A is determined by 100%. On the special figure 2 side, since the type of loss is one type of loss A, it is only necessary to determine the loss A without providing the loss symbol table (without performing the symbol lottery).

Further, with respect to a part or all of each of the above-mentioned symbol tables, a symbol table defining different symbol selection rates depending on the set value may be provided. For example, with respect to the big hit symbol table, for each of the setting values 1 to 6, it is possible to provide a table (in this case, 6 kinds of big hit symbol tables corresponding to 6 setting values) having different selection ratios of the big hits (small hit). The same applies to the symbol table and the lost symbol table). For example, to describe representatively the hit type on the special drawing 1 side, the symbol lottery rate for the big hits 1 to 4 is set to "3%, 7%, 55%, 35%" in the case of setting 1, and setting 6 In the case of, it is possible to set “8%, 12%, 45%, 35%” (the higher the setting, the winning probability of the big hit 1 which becomes a trigger for the small hit rush (potential accuracy state) transition, and the big hit 2 ( Probability of winning 16R) is relatively high). Further, the probability variation inrush rate may be constant regardless of the set value, but may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the example of FIG. 4, the probability variation inrush rate is 65% (35% is a reduction in hour and hour), but in the case of setting 1, the probability variation inrush rate is 60%, and in the case of setting 6, the probability variation inrush rate is 65%. Depending on the situation, the probability variation inrush rate may be different for all or some of the set values. Similarly, the hour-shortening rush rate may be constant regardless of the set value, or may be different in all or part of the set value. The symbol lottery rate, the probability variation plunge rate, and the shortened time plunge rate can be determined so that the payout performance becomes more advantageous to the player as the set value becomes higher.

Then, as in the case of the above-described prefetch failure determination, the above-mentioned prefetch symbol result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being taken into a predetermined general-purpose register incorporated in the CPU. This is because the look-ahead symbol result is immediately used in the subsequent look-ahead variation pattern determination, and this data is not needed and need not be stored in the RAM.

((C) Random number determination process at the time of starting mouth winning (prefetch variation pattern determination process))
In the look-ahead variation pattern determination processing, first, a look-ahead variation pattern allocation table (not shown) is acquired according to the above-mentioned look-ahead symbol result, and the variation pattern random number value acquired in the processing of step S353 is acquired. Next, a variation pattern lottery (preliminary variation pattern determination) is performed based on the obtained prefetch variation pattern distribution table and the variation pattern random number value to determine the prefetch variation pattern. In other words, the look-ahead of the variation pattern at the start of variation (the result of the special symbol variation pattern creating process described later (see S417 of FIG. 18 below)) determined when the current operation holding ball is subjected to the variation display operation Judgment is made and the result (prefetch change pattern) is acquired. In the look-ahead variation pattern allocation table, winning command data 1 (holding addition command (EVENT)) corresponding to the look-ahead variation pattern is determined. That is, the content of the look-ahead change pattern (excluding the reserved ball count information) is designated by the winning command data 1 determined in the look-ahead change pattern determination processing. As a result, the winning command data 1 is updated from “9FH” set in step S354 to a data value corresponding to the look-ahead variation pattern (step S359).

In the look-ahead variation pattern distribution table, a plurality of types of look-ahead variations according to the game state and the winning type (for the loss A (for both special figure 1 and special figure 2), the loss B, the loss C, and the big hit 1-8) A pattern distribution table is provided, and the table configuration is such that the look-ahead variation pattern (winning command data 1) can be determined by lottery using random number values for variation patterns. For example, in the case where “SP SP reach A during normal operation” (see the column of “Loss B” in FIG. 35(a)) is determined as the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation when the current operation holding ball is used for the fluctuation display operation. Even in the pre-reading variation pattern determination, the pre-reading variation pattern information (for example, "03H" as the winning command data 1) designating "normal SP reach A" can be obtained. When determining the look-ahead variation pattern, the same variation pattern allocation table as at the start of variation is not used. This is because the number of operation-holding balls at the time of pre-reading determination does not always match the number of operation-holding at the time of start of variation, so that the exact change pattern at the start of variation cannot be pre-reading determined. For this reason, in the determination stage of the look-ahead variation pattern, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of operation-holding balls. However, even if the look-ahead variation pattern is determined without considering the number of operation-holding balls in this way, it is possible to determine a look-ahead variation pattern in which the contents of the look-ahead variation pattern and the variation pattern at the start of variation do not deviate as much as possible. .. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 34 to 36) corresponding to the set values is provided, the above-mentioned prefetch variation pattern distribution table similarly corresponds to each set value. Is provided. Of course, a common table may be used for each set value.

The prefetching variation pattern information (prize command data 1 (EVENT)) is immediately used in the process of creating the pending addition command in step S359, and thereafter this data is not needed. Therefore, also here, the processing is finished while the result of the prefetch variation pattern determination is stored in the register without being stored in the RAM 203.

After finishing the series of look-ahead determination processing of steps S358 to S359, subsequently, the winning command data 1 (EVENT) on the lower byte side obtained in the above-described look-ahead variation pattern determination processing, the current number of operation reserve balls and special symbols A "hold addition command" is created based on the winning command data 2 (MODE) on the upper byte side based on the type (step S360), and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 without being stored in the RAM 203 (step S360). S361). For the data on the MODE side, for example, "B6H to B9H" is set according to 1 hold of special figure 1 to 4 hold of special figure 1, and 1 hold of special figure 2 to hold of special figure 2 “BBH to BEH” is set according to the four. Regarding the data on the EVENT side, if the pre-reading prohibition condition is satisfied or the setting value data abnormality occurs, the pre-reading prohibition data (9FH) acquired in step S354 is not updated in the process of step S359. The hold addition command “**9FH (“**” is any value of B6H to B9H and BBH to BEH)” that is maintained as it is and has prefetch prohibition data is transmitted.

Further, in the determination processing in step S351, when the number of operation holding balls is the maximum holding storage number (4) (step S351:=MAX), it is determined that an over-winning has occurred, and an over-winning command is given to the effect control unit. 24 (step S363). Specifically, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, that is, if an over-winning occurs in the special figure 1 starting opening (middle starting opening 34 or right starting opening 33), for over-winning for special drawing 1 The command “B006H” is transmitted. If the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, that is, if an over-winning occurs at the special figure 2 starting opening (lower right starting opening 35), the over-winning command "B106H" for special drawing 2 is transmitted. To be done.

After the above-mentioned hold addition command or over-winning command is sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, when the "prefetching notice effect" relating to the current operation hold ball is displayed on the effect control unit 24 side. It is only used, not used in subsequent processing. Therefore, these commands are not stored in the RAM 203, and the start opening check process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the starting port check processing is ended without storing the various data obtained in the series of prefetch determination processing in step S358 in the RAM one by one. As a result, the memory capacity of the ROM or RAM can be reduced, and the control load can be reduced.

In addition, in the starting mouth check process (process at the time of winning), the hold addition command is transmitted regardless of whether or not the set value data is abnormal, but the hold addition command has prefetching prohibition data (9FH). Since it is a command, the effect control itself related to the prefetching notice is prohibited. Therefore, the pre-reading notice due to the defect does not appear. If you create a pending addition command related to the set value, or if the pre-reading notice effect based on this is configured to be able to appear, a configuration that allows the pre-reading notice when an error occurs in the set value data In that case, there is a possibility that a defective prefetching notice effect, for example, a high-expectation prefetching notice or an accurate prefetching notice may appear unnecessarily due to the abnormality in the set value data. However, in the case of the present embodiment, if the set value data is abnormal, the pre-reading notice itself is prohibited at all, so such a problem does not occur. Further, even if a high-anticipation look-ahead notice effect appears due to a defect, it is impossible for the player to determine whether it is due to an abnormality. Therefore, if the game progress is forcibly stopped by the subsequent RAM error processing (step S411 during the special symbol variation start processing shown in FIG. 18 described later), and the high-anticipation look-ahead notice effect disappears However, the expectation of winning held by the player is extinguished at a stretch, which causes a great distrust of the gaming machine, but in the case of the present embodiment, such a problem does not occur.

<18. Special symbol fluctuation start processing: Figure 18>
Next, the special symbol variation start process (steps S331 and S334) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether the current special symbol operation confirmation data is “00H (special target 1 is the processing target)” or “01H (special target 2 is the processing target)” ( Step S401). If the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, the current processing target is the special figure 1, so in this case, it is determined whether the special figure 1 operation holding ball is zero (step S403), If the figure 1 operation holding sphere is zero (step S403: YES), the "customer waiting command transmission process" of step S420 described below is executed, and if the special figure 1 operation holding sphere is not zero (step S403: NO). ), the processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S404 to S419) is performed for the special figure 1 operation holding sphere to be used for the current fluctuation display.

On the other hand, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, since the current processing target is the special figure 2, it is determined in this case whether the special figure 2 operation holding ball is zero (step S402). If the special figure 2 operation holding sphere is zero (step S402: YES), the "customer waiting command transmission process" of step S420 described later is executed, and if the special figure 2 operation holding sphere is not zero (step S402). : NO), the process at the start of fluctuation (steps S404 to S419) for the special figure 2 operation holding sphere to be used for the present fluctuation display is executed.

(Customer waiting command transmission process: step S420)
In step S420, when the special figure 1 is the processing target (special symbol operation confirmation data “00H”), the processing described below is performed. First, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 operation status is "waiting for customer (00H)". If the special symbol 1 operation status is "waiting for customers (00H)", since it is already waiting for customers, without doing anything, exit the customer waiting command transmission process, exit the special symbol variation start process. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 operation status is not "waiting for customer (00H)", the customer waiting standby process is executed when the special figure 1 operation holding ball becomes zero. In this customer waiting standby process, the special symbol 1 operation status is set to 00H, and the special symbol 1 side is moved to a standby state without holding (first customer waiting state) "Special symbol 1 hold zero command (BA14H)" To the effect control unit 24. Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation status and the special symbol 2 operation status are "waiting for customers (00H)", and if both are "waiting for customers (00H)", the entire hold is Assuming that the customer wait state of zero (third customer wait state) has been entered, "all pending zero time command (BA04H)" is transmitted to the production control unit 24, and the customer wait command transmission process is exited. In the case of the present embodiment, this all-holding zero command is the same command as the customer waiting command (BA04H) transmitted when the power is turned on (see steps S023 and S029 in FIG. 8A).

Even when the special figure 2 is the processing target, the processing contents are almost the same as those in the case of the special figure 1 described above. In step S420, if the special symbol 2 is the processing target (special symbol operation confirmation data “01H”), it is first determined whether or not the special symbol 2 operation status is “waiting for customer (00H)”. If the special symbol 2 operation status is "waiting for customers (00H)", without doing anything, exit the customer waiting command transmission process, exit the special symbol variation start process. On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 operation status is not “waiting for customer (00H)”, the customer waiting standby process is executed when the special figure 2 operation holding ball becomes zero. In this customer waiting standby process, 00H is set to the special symbol 2 operation status, and the special figure 2 side is shifted to a standby state without a hold (second customer wait state) "Special figure 2 hold zero command (BA24H)" To the effect control unit 24. Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation status and the special symbol 2 operation status are "waiting for customers (00H)", and if both are "waiting for customers (00H)", the entire hold is Assuming that the customer wait state of zero has been entered, the "all pending zero time command (BA04H)" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the customer wait command transmission process is exited.

Here, if the special symbol operation status "waiting for customers (00H)", without doing anything, the reason for exiting the special symbol variation start process is the customer waiting command without conditions when the number of operation-holding balls is zero. When transmitted, the demo display command is repeatedly transmitted at a cycle of 4 ms while the number of operation-holding balls is zero, which causes unnecessary transmission. Therefore, in the case of the above-mentioned "no operation holding ball", the special command 1, the special command 2, and the all-hold-on-zero command are transmitted once, and if the demo display command has already been transmitted, This special symbol variation start process can be exited without transmitting a demonstration display command to the effect control unit 24.

When the production control unit 24 receives the special figure 1 hold zero time command, the current game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state, that is, the special figure 1 table variation state (see FIG. 7B). , If the special symbol variation display game 1, which is the table variation side, is not performed for the first predetermined time (for example, 59 seconds) or more, the first demo state (first normal customer waiting presentation mode) is entered, Display the waiting demo screen. At this time, the first demo screen is displayed even if the special figure 2 is changing (back side changing). The first demonstration state (first demonstration screen) is continued at least until the special figure 1 operation holding ball is generated (may be until the variable display of the special figure 1 is started).

When the production control unit 24 receives the special figure 2 hold zero time command, the current game state is the latent state, that is, the special figure 2 table changing state (see FIG. 7B), and the second predetermined time. If the special symbol variation display game 2 on the table variation side has not been performed (for example, 60 seconds) or more, the second demonstration state (second normal customer waiting effect mode) is entered and the demonstration screen is displayed. At this time, the second demo screen is displayed even if the special figure 1 is changing (back side changing). The second demo state (second demo screen) is continued at least until the special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated (may be until the variable display of the special figure 2 is started).

When the production control unit 24 receives the all-holding zero time command, in this case, since the total operation holding balls are zero, regardless of the game state, over the third predetermined time (for example, 61 seconds), When the symbol variation display games 1 and 2 are not executed, the state is shifted to the third demo state (third normal customer waiting effect mode) and the demo screen is displayed. The third demo state (third demo screen) is continued in the current game state until at least the operation holding ball relating to the table fluctuation side occurs.

In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses after the display of the third demo screen indicating that there is no total hold (after transition to the third demo state), the mode shifts to the "power saving mode (special customer waiting effect mode)". This power saving mode is a “power saving customer waiting state” in which the gaming machine 1 is controlled to have low power consumption. In the case of this embodiment, as the power saving mode transition condition, after the third demo screen is displayed (after the third demo state transition), a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses without switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). In addition, the power saving mode is set. When the power saving mode shift condition is satisfied, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a power saving screen (for example, a character display of "power saving" on the liquid crystal screen), and the button LED 13b is removed, and the decoration is performed. It is controlled so that a part or all of the lamp 45 and other effect LEDs are turned off. Since the power saving mode is switched via the demo screen, the button LED 13b has already been informed of the operation validity in the power saving mode. However, in the main processing on the main control side shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, after the game start command (see step S034 in FIG. 8B) is transmitted, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the mode is changed to the “power saving mode”. Has become. This is because it is determined that the game startable state is not ready until the game start command is transmitted from the main control unit 20.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the operation of the effect button 13 or the direction key 75 is detected during the display period of the demo screen (during the demo screen), the "menu screen (game setting It is possible to switch the display to "Direction". The timing at which the screen can be switched to the menu screen, that is, the button valid period (operation valid period) in the demo screen is notified by the button LED 13b. In the case of this embodiment, the button LED 13b lights up or blinks in a notification mode (for example, orange) different from the normal notification mode (for example, white) as an operation valid notification on the demo screen, and it is a period during which the screen can be switched to the menu screen. Is notified.

The first predetermined time, the second predetermined time, and the third predetermined time may be the same time, or some of them (for example, the first predetermined time and the second predetermined time) may be the same time. It may be. The display contents of the first demo screen, the second demo screen, and the third demo screen may be the same or different. In the case of the first demo screen and the second demo screen, the dedicated display area 160 may be preferentially displayed with respect to the demo screen to clarify the variable display operation of the special figure during the back fluctuation.

In the following description of steps S404 to S419, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (the case is the processing for the special figure 1 operation reserved ball, 01H (the special figure 2 is the processing target), the special figure 2 operation is reserved. Although the processing is for a sphere, the method of processing is substantially the same, so unless there is a particular need, in order to avoid duplicate description, the case where the special figure 1 is the processing target is explained, and The case where 2 is the processing target will be omitted in the description.

When the process proceeds to step S404, the number of operation-reserving balls is decremented by 1 (the number of operation-retaining balls in the special figure to be used for the variable display operation of this time-1: step S404), and the "reserve" including the information of the number of operation-retaining balls after subtraction The subtraction command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S405). With this hold subtraction command, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the number of remaining operation hold balls after the current number of operation hold balls have been exhausted, and shifts the hold display currently displayed.

Next, the pending data stored in the pending storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the hold data (random number for big hit determination, random number for special symbol determination, and variation pattern) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the number of hold memories n=1 A random number is read out and stored in the judgment random number storage area of the RAM 203, and at the same time, a reserved storage area (reserved 2 storage area, reserved 3 storage area, reserved 4 storage) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n=2, 3, 4). The reserved data stored in the area) is stored in the reserved storage areas corresponding to'n-1', and the reserved 4 storage areas are cleared to zero to provide an empty area. As a result, the start order of the special symbol variable display game matches the order of the operation holding balls number n (n=1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation holding balls acquired at the time of winning the start mouth are stored in any of the holding memories. Whether or not the area corresponds to the area is specified, and a new operation holding ball can be held and stored.

Next, a game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). Details of the game state information transmission processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a setting abnormality check process is executed (step S409), and it is determined whether the setting error flag is in the ON state (=5AH) (step S410). The setting abnormality check process of step S409 is common to the setting abnormality check process of step S356 (FIG. 27) during the starting opening check process of FIG. 17, and the processing content of step S410 is the same as the step in the same process. This is the same process as S357.

(When a setting error has not occurred (in the normal case): S410→S413 processing route)
First, a case where the setting error flag is not ON (normal operation) will be described, and a case where the setting error flag is ON (when the RAM is abnormal) will be described later.

When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S410:=5AH), a setting value command is transmitted to determine whether or not a big hit is won, a big hit determination process, and a small hit to determine whether or not a big hit is won. The hit determination process is sequentially executed (steps S413 and S414). The set value command includes information that can specify the current set value, and is used by the effect control unit 24 side when the appearance control of the notice effect, the setting suggestion effect, and the like based on the set value. Details of the big hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, and details of the small hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Regarding performance aspects related to set values)
Since the above-mentioned setting value command includes setting value information, the effect control unit 24 can grasp and manage the current setting value from the setting value command. In the present embodiment, an effect related to the current setting value (for example, a setting suggestion effect described later) can be displayed in the notice effect (including the advance notice) and the hit effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a guessing element for guessing the internal set value, and the player can enjoy the game while guessing what the internal set value is. Further, by realizing the effect according to the set value, it is possible to make various variations of the effect.

Examples of the "setting suggestion effect" are "low setting suggestion effect" suggesting a low setting (settings 1 to 3), "even setting suggestion effect" suggesting an even number setting (settings 2, 4, 6), and odd setting. "Odd setting suggestion effect" suggesting (settings 1, 3, 5), "high setting suggestion effect" implying high setting (settings 4 to 6), and "setting 6" having the highest setting value are definitely notified. There are "setting 6 final effect", a specific range suggesting effect that suggests a setting value of a specific range (for example, setting N or more (N<6)). For example, a specific item image or character image may be displayed, or a specific sound effect or a specific light effect may be displayed to suggest the current setting value. Such a setting suggestion effect can be displayed in association with various notice effects such as reach effect, pseudo-relation, player participation type effect, look-ahead notice effect, and the like.

In addition, as an effect related to the set value, the appearance rate of one or more types of specific notice effects (for example, normal SP reach B or SP reach with pseudo 3 etc.) at each set value or some set values Can be different. For example, even if the same variation pattern (for example, normal SP reach A) is selected in setting 1 and setting 6, the setting estimation element is generated due to the difference in appearance rate. Further, regarding the decorative pattern, with each set value or a part of the set values, the appearance rate of a specific lost symbol mode (decorative stop symbol at the time of loss: for example, "2" "2" "4") should be different. You can The appearance rate can be appropriately determined. For example, the appearance rate is set to a high probability in the order of settings 1 to 6, different appearance rates are set for the settings 1 to 3, the settings 4 to 5, and the setting 6, or the settings 1 to 3 are set to the same appearance rate to the settings 4 to 4. 6 can have different appearance rates.

It is also possible to make a setting suggestion effect using a look-ahead notice effect. For example, the hold display (hold icon) can be changed to an item image for suggesting settings, or a hold icon using a hold color other than the special hold display mode can be displayed (special hold display mode). In this case, the special hold display mode can be used to bring out the above-described low setting suggestion effect to specific range suggestion effect. Further, the appearance rate of the special hold display mode may be different for each set value or a part of the set values. Further, the appearance rate of a specific special hold display mode (for example, blue hold color) may be different for each set value or a part of the set values without using the special hold display mode.

In addition, after the power is turned on, the setting suggestion effect is made to appear when the symbol variable display game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 128 games), or within a specific game number range (for example, between 128 games and 150 games). The appearance rate can be high. Further, not only after the power is turned on, it may be after the big hit game is over, or after the big hit by a specific big hit is over. Further, it is also possible to target the hitting performance during a big hit game that triggers a transition to a probability changing state or a time saving state (no transition to a latent probability state) and the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed after the big hitting game ends. Especially, if you can not get the shift to the small hit rush even if it becomes a big hit (if you win the big hit (see Figure 4) when the latent state is not changed) It is preferable to appear with a higher probability (including 100%) than when the probability state transition opportunity big hit is won (the appearance rate may be 0%). On the contrary, when the setting suggestive effect is won as the bonus that won the shift to the small hit rush (when the latent chance state transition trigger big hit (see FIG. 4) is won) It is preferable to appear with a higher probability (including 100%) than the appearance rate may be 0%.

After finishing the winning lottery in steps S413 to S414, a special stop symbol creating process is then executed (step S415). This special stop symbol creation process is a process of executing a symbol lottery, and the winning type (winning type) is determined by this process. Specifically, the special symbol determination data (winning type (symbol type)) and the special stop symbol number are determined. Note that this special stop symbol creation process is substantially the same as the "special winning symbol special stop symbol creation process (prefetch symbol determination process)" described in the prefetch determination process (step S358) during the start opening check process of FIG. This is the processing content, and here, the symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation is performed.

Next, a game state transition preparation process is executed (step S416). In this game state transition preparation process, in the case of a big hit, necessary setting processing for designating the game state after the big hit game is finished is performed based on the big hit type and the current game state (see FIG. 4).

Next, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S417). In this special symbol variation pattern creation process, the variation pattern (FIGS. 33 to 36) at the time of variation start relating to the operation-holding sphere to be used for the variation display operation this time is determined. Details of this special symbol variation pattern creation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a command transmission process at the start of fluctuation (step S418) is performed. In the command transmission process at the start of fluctuation, a "fluctuation pattern designation command" capable of specifying the contents of the fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S417) is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side. To do. In this variation pattern designation command, as variation pattern information, for example, game state information, winning lottery result information, variation time of special symbols, presence/absence of pseudo-repetition (if there is pseudo-repetition, the number of pseudo-repetitions), reach effect Information (whether there is a reach effect, the reach effect type) is included, and is used by the effect control unit 24 side when determining various notice effects to be displayed during the decorative symbol variable display game. It

In addition, following the variation pattern designation command, based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process (step S415), a "decorative symbol designation command" is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This decorative symbol designation command is composed of 2 bytes, a high-order byte (MODE) that designates a special symbol type and a low-order byte (EVNET) that designates a big hit type, a small hit type, and a lost type. Therefore, the "decorative symbol designation command" includes information about the special symbol type and the winning type (symbol lottery result). Since the decorative pattern designation command includes the winning type information, mainly on the side of the effect control unit 24, a combination of decorative patterns (reach pattern) when forming the reach state, or a decorative pattern to be finally stopped and displayed. It is used when determining the combination of (decorative stop design). Since the variation pattern designation command includes at least the winning result information and the variation pattern information, the effect control unit 24, based on the variation pattern designation command, the notice effect mode related to the present symbol variation display game. It is also possible to determine the stop decoration symbol and execute the symbol variable display game.

Then, as a variation start time setting process, the special symbol operation status “during variation (02H)” is switched (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and the variation flag of the special symbol type to be processed this time is turned on (5AH is set. Storing), and the determination random number storage area is cleared to zero (step S419). The "changing flag" is a flag indicating whether the special symbol is changing, and when the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), it indicates that the display operation of the special symbol is being changed and displayed. If the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), it indicates that the special symbol is being stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the "special symbol 1 changing flag" corresponding to special figure 1 and the "special symbol 2 changing flag" corresponding to special figure 2 are handled. Since special figure 1 has been described here, the special symbol 1 changing flag is turned on, and the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "changing (02H)".

(When a setting error occurs (when RAM is abnormal): S410→S415 processing route)
Returning to the description of step S410, if the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S357:=5AH), it is determined that a setting value data abnormality has occurred, and the processing of steps S413 to S414 related to the winning lottery is skipped and step S415. The special stop symbol creation process is executed.

In the present embodiment, the winning lottery is not executed when the set value data abnormality occurs. In the previous symbol variation display game, when the big hit or the small hit is won, the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag indicating the winning are cleared (00H) at the end of the symbol variation display game. (See steps S505 and S511 of FIG. 26A described later). Therefore, when the winning lottery process of steps S413 to S414 is not executed in the present symbol variable display game, the winning lottery result is always "miss".

In the special stop symbol creation process of step S415, the symbol lottery is executed based on the winning lottery result being "miss". In the case of a setting error, the loss pattern may be determined using the loss symbol table as usual, but the error-specific loss may be determined. For example, in the present embodiment, the “misses A to C” are provided, but the “misses D” that are not normally selected can be provided as the loses for the setting error (the error type).

Next, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S417). Details of the special symbol variation pattern creation processing when a setting error occurs will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, when the special symbol variation pattern creation process is finished, the processes of steps S418 and S419 are executed to exit the special symbol variation start process.

When the special symbol variation start process is exited as described above, the special symbol display data update process (step S335) in FIG. 16 is performed, and thus the variable display of the special symbol is started.

(Modification when a setting error occurs)
In the above embodiment, when the setting error occurs, the winning lottery (big hit determination process, small hit determination process) is skipped, but not only the winning lottery but also the symbol lottery (step S415), the variation pattern lottery (step The steps S415 to S419 including S416) may be skipped and the processing may be terminated without doing anything. In other words, the special symbol management process is exited without starting the symbol variable display game. In this case, since the variation pattern designating command and the decorative design designating command are not transmitted to the effect control unit 24, it is preferable to control the game to be inexecutable as a RAM error has occurred. For example, when a RAM error occurs, data to be transmitted to at least special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in order to explicitly notify that the game progress has stopped (that the special symbol variable display game is not executed). To clear. Further, during this RAM error, it is preferable not to execute at least the normal symbol management processing (step S091) to the special electric auditors management processing (step S095) as the processing relating to the symbol variable display game. Since the performance display monitor process (step S101) is a process belonging to the out-of-area memory side, the process may be executed even if a RAM error occurs.

<19. Game status information transmission process: FIG. 19>
Next, the game state information transmission process (step S408) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the game state information transmission process.

In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first executes a changing command transmission process (step S425). In the changing command transmission process, first, the current special symbol 1 operation status and the special symbol 2 operation status are acquired, a changing command is created, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

The "changing command" is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte data (EEH:MODE) that specifies that the command is a changing command, and the special figure that can specify the behavior of special figure 1 and special figure 2 It is composed of lower byte data (EVENT) including behavior information. In the data of the lower byte (EVENT), the upper 4 bits are the special figure behavior information (“1*H” to “3*H”: * is 1 to 3) of special figure 2 and the lower 4 bits are the special figure 1 special characteristics. It is the figure behavior information (“*1H” to “*3H”: * is 1 to 3), and the behavior of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is designated by these combinations. For example, "EE11H" indicates "waiting for special figure 2 and waiting for special figure 1", "EE12H" indicates "waiting for special figure 2, changing special figure 1", and "EE13H" If there is, it indicates "waiting for special map 2 and confirming special map 2". The special figure behavior information included in the changing command is, on the side of the effect control unit 24, the effect display of the fourth design 157 and the fourth design 159 in the dedicated display area 160, the effect display between the front variation state and the back variation state. It is used when switching.

Then, the state command transmission process is executed (step S426). The state command includes at least game state information capable of specifying the current game state, but in the case of the present embodiment, in addition to the current game state, big hit count information (first hit/big hit count information in the condominium), A status command including the remaining time saving information and the remaining ST information is transmitted. The information included in the state command is used on the side of the effect control unit 24 for transition control of the effect mode, advance notice effect lottery, and for displaying the remaining number of shortened times and the number of consecutive games on the liquid crystal screen. When the state command transmission is completed, the game state information transmission process is exited.

<20. Big hit determination process: Figure 20>
Next, the big hit determination process (step S413) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit determination process.

In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 first sequentially determines the states of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag and the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag (steps S431 and S432). The special symbol 1 big hit determination flag, the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is a flag for designating whether or not the big hit is won, and when the flag is in the ON state (=5 AH), the big hit is won. When the flag is OFF (=00H), a big hit non-win (in the big hit non-win state) is shown. The special symbol 1 big hit determination flag or the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is set to 5AH (winning) or 00H (non-winning) based on the winning lottery result (winning lottery result regarding big hit) in step S436 described later. When the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag or the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH), the symbol variable display game ends (accurately, the fixed display time elapses after the variable display of the special symbol ends. At the time) it is cleared to zero (special symbol big hit determination flag ← 00H) (see step S505 of FIG. 26A described later).

When either one of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag and the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (the determination result of step S431 or S432 is'=5AH'), that is, when the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 starts When FIG. 2 is a big hit, or when the special figure 1 is a big win at the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2, the big hit determination process is ended without doing anything.

On the other hand, if both the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag and the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag are in the OFF state (00H) (the determination result of step S431 or S432 is'≠5AH'), the above according to the special symbol operation confirmation data A hit random number determination table (not shown) is acquired (step S433). This hit random number table is the same as the table used in the jackpot big hit random number determination process (prefetch loss determination process) during the prefetch determination process (step S358 of FIG. 17).

Next, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired (step S434), and a winning lottery is performed based on the jackpot determination random number value and the hit random number determination table (step S435: random number determination processing). The result is stored in the big hit determination flag area of the RAM 203 (step S436). However, here, the winning of the big hit is determined, and the winning of the small hit is performed in the subsequent small hit determining process (step S414). As a result, the big hit determination process is exited, and subsequently the small hit determination process is executed.

(Regular lottery (with big hit winning lottery), no big hit lottery (without big hit winning lottery))
In addition to the jackpot determination process, when the determination target this time is the special figure 1 operation-holding ball, when the other special figure 2 is already in the jackpot winning state when the big hit determination process is executed (step S432: Special symbol 2 big hit determination flag=5AH), the big hit determination process of this time is exited without executing the hit determination (step S435) of the own big hit. Similarly, when the processing target this time is the special figure 2 operation holding ball, if the other special figure 1 is already in the big hit winning state (step S431: special symbol 1 big hit determination flag=5AH), The jackpot determination process of this time is skipped without executing the jackpot winning determination (step S435). That is, when it is determined that one special symbol is a big hit (when the result of the symbol variable display game is a big hit), when the winning lottery related to the other special symbol is executed, the big hit is the lottery. It is controlled to a “big hit no lottery state (special lottery state: hereinafter abbreviated as “no lottery”)” in which it is excluded from the target, that is, whether or not to win or lose the big hit. Therefore, as a result of the other symbol variation display game under the big hit non-lottery result, a result other than the big hit, that is, "miss" or "small hit" is derived. In the case of the present embodiment, when the special drawing 1 side wins lottery, when the special drawing 2 side is a big hit, the special lottery 1 side winning lottery result is “miss” and the special drawing 2 side When the special drawing 1 side is a big hit when the winning lottery is executed, the winning lottery result on the special drawing 1 side is “small win or loss”.

<21. Small hit determination process: Figure 21>
Next, the small hit determination process (step S414) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the small hit determination process.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first determines special symbol operation confirmation data (step S441). When the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S441:=00H), the small hit determination process is ended without doing anything. This is because the big hit lottery target on the special map 1 side does not include a small hit. Therefore, when the big hit lottery target on the special figure 1 side includes a small hit, the processes of steps S442 to S445 described below may be executed.

When the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (step S441: = 01H), the special random number determination table for special figure 2 is acquired (step S442), and the big hit determination random number value stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired. Yes (step S443).

Then, the winning lottery is performed based on the big hit determination random number value and the hit random number determination table (step S4444: random number determination process), and the result is stored in the small hit determination flag area of the RAM 203 (step S445). Here, as a part of the winning lottery, the winning of the small hit is determined. If you do not win either the big hit or the small hit, the result of this lottery will be lost.

<22. Fluctuation pattern creation process: FIG. 22>
Next, the fluctuation pattern creation process (step S417) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing details of the variation pattern creation processing.

In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first obtains the “fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table” shown in FIG. 33 (step S451), and then the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (special figure 1 is the processing target). It is determined whether or not there is (01) (the special target 2 is the processing target) (step S452). In the variation pattern distribution table selection table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the current gaming state (YJ), the winning type (special symbol determination data), the special symbol jackpot determination flag (normal lottery, no lottery distinction) , And the fluctuation pattern allocation table (FB1 to FB16 (for big hits), FH1 to FH1). FH25 (for losing) is defined.

If the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, that is, the special diagram 1 is the processing target (step S452:=00H), the current game state is referred to with reference to the variation pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. (YJ), the winning type (special symbol determination data), the state of the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag, and the special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern distribution table according to the number of operation-holding balls (for big hits in FIG. 34 or special feature in FIG. 35) (Loss for FIG. 1) is acquired (step S453B).

On the other hand, when the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, that is, when the special figure 2 is the processing target (step S452:=0lH), the current variation is determined by referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. Game state (YJ), winning type (special symbol determination data), state of special symbol 1 big hit determination flag, and special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern distribution table according to the number of operation holding balls (FIG. 34 (for big hit), FIG. 36) (Looseness/Small hit for special figure 2) is acquired (step S453A).

Next, the random number for the fluctuation pattern (the size of the random number: 10000) is acquired, and the fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern distribution table acquired in the process of step S453A or step S453B (step S455). As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the variation pattern distribution table defines a determination value (winning area) corresponding to the variation pattern, and one of the variation patterns is determined at a predetermined selection rate. It has become so. For example, in the variation pattern distribution table FB1 of FIG. 34, the selection rate of "normal variation direct hit" is 200/10000, normal medium N reach 1 is 80/10000,..., RUSH direct hit reach is 2600/10000. Then, one of the fluctuation patterns per normal fluctuation direct hit to RUSH direct hit is determined by lottery. When the variation pattern is determined, command data on the upper byte side (MODE) and the lower byte side (EVENT) for forming the “variation pattern designation command” are determined. The variation pattern designation command itself is created in the subsequent process of step S418 of FIG. 18, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

Along with the determination of the variation pattern, a variation time table (not shown) corresponding to the variation pattern is also determined (step S456). In this "variation time table", the variation time of the special symbol is set, and the variation time is determined by referring to the variation time table.

Then, in the special symbol operation timer 1 according to the current special symbol operation confirmation data, the variable time determined in step S456 is set (step S457). If the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, the variable time is set in the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 of the special symbol 1, and if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 of the special symbol 2 Set the fluctuation time.

As described above, the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation processing is exited, and the command transmission processing (step S418) at the start of fluctuation in FIG. 18 is executed.

(22-1. Variation pattern distribution table selection process targeting special figure 2: Steps S453A to S455)
Here, the fluctuation pattern allocation table selection table and the fluctuation pattern allocation table, which are the characteristic elements of the present invention, will be described. Here, for convenience of description, first, the case where the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (step S452: = 01H), that is, the case where the current processing target is the special figure 2 operation holding ball will be described.

In the process of step S453A, the variation pattern distribution table is determined by referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 33. In particular, in the “latent probability state” in which the special figure 2 is the table variation state, the symbol lottery is performed. When the result is "Loss A (special figure 2 hold 0 loss A, special figure 2 hold 1-3 loss A) or small hit (special figure 2 hold 0 small hit, special figure 2 hold 1-3 small hit)" The variable pattern allocation table that can be selected differs depending on the ON/OFF state of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag. In other words, the variable pattern distribution table that can be selected differs depending on whether or not the special figure 1 side has won the big hit.

Specifically, referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 33, if the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is not in the OFF state (00H), that is, the other special figure 1 has not won the big hit. When the jackpot is in the non-winning state (special figure 1 loss variation)”, one of the variation pattern distribution tables “FH9 to FH12” in the “normal lottery” column shown in the figure is selected. Has become. On the other hand, if the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, if the other special drawing 1 is in the "big hit winning state (special figure 1 big hit variation)" that is winning the big hit, the same. One of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH13 to FH16" in the "No lottery" column shown is to be selected ("Hold 0 Loss A in special symbol type column "Special diagram 2"). ~ Refer to the fluctuation pattern allocation table corresponding to "holding 1-3 small hits"). In addition, in the case of the'normal state, the time saving state and the probability variation state' in which the special figure 2 is the back variation state, the common variation pattern distribution table "FH7" is selected regardless of the state of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag. It is supposed to be done.

In this way, when the current processing target is the special figure 2, whether or not the other special figure 1 has been won for the big hit (special symbol 1 big hit determination flag ON/OFF state: big hit winning lottery of special figure 1) The reason why the result) is defined as one of the selection conditions of the variation pattern is as follows.

When the object to be processed this time is the special figure 2 side, and the other special figure 1 has already won the big hit, the big hit winning lottery of the special figure 2 (step S435 in FIG. 20) is not executed. Therefore, the winning lottery result of this time is forced to be either “miss” or “small hit” (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and the symbol lottery result (step S415 of FIG. 18) is “miss A” or It will be one of the "small hits". In the following, the case where the big hit winning lottery is executed is referred to as "at the time of normal lottery", and the case where the big hit winning lottery is not executed is referred to as "at the time of no lottery" or "at the time of forced loss".

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, the current game state will be described as being “in the latent probability state (variable state of special figure 2 table)” in which a small hit rush occurs.

During the latent probability state, a high-speed fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 2s to normal fluctuation 4s) in which the fluctuation time width of the special symbol is 2 seconds to 4 seconds is selected with high probability (see FIG. 36). Such a "high-speed fluctuation state" is mainly a game state that emphasizes the playability of "increasing the average digestion speed of the game and improving the time efficiency regarding the progress of the game (increasing the payout speed)". It is useful. In particular, in the latent state where a small hit rush occurs, many players want to stack the balls quickly in a short time and want to enjoy the speed of increasing the balls, and the high-speed fluctuation state is suitable for such a game state. Is.

On the other hand, when selecting a fluctuation pattern, in order to fuel the expectation of winning the big hit, the fluctuations that specify the reach effect and the pseudo fluctuations that specify the pseudo-relation are appropriately interwoven to create a monotonous effect. It is necessary to devise so that it will not happen. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, for example, the variation pattern distribution table "FH9 to FH12" (see the column of "Hidden probability (normal lottery)") for normal lottery (with special drawing 2 big hit winning lottery) shown in FIG. As described above, the variation pattern designating the notice effect having a high degree of agitation (for example, the high expectation notice effect) is included in the selection target. Specifically, "Spotency medium weak SP reach (variation time 30 seconds)", "Substantial medium strong SP reach (variation time 40 seconds)" and "Fall avoidance reach reach (variation time 20 seconds) )” and other high-anticipation notice effects (for example, high-anticipation notice effects such as SP reach, special notice effects that encourage the 7 patterns (small hit rush transition confirmation pattern) to reach or not (fall avoidance reach) , A player participation type production, etc.) are included in the selection target.

However, under the condition of no lottery, if the variation pattern designating the notice effect having a high degree of agitation is included in the selection targets like the above-described conventional variation pattern selection technique, only a loss or a small hit is won. Nonetheless, a variation pattern is selected indiscriminately with a long variation time, resulting in a game situation in which the progress of the game is unnecessarily delayed. In addition, in the situation of no-lottery, the high-anticipation notice production only meaninglessly fuels the player's tension and the like, and it is of little significance to bring out the production.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, with respect to the variation pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. 33, the variation pattern distribution table can be selected according to whether it is in the normal lottery or in the non-lottery. Here, since it is explained that the current gaming state is the latent state, when the other special map 1 is in the "big hit non-winning state (special map 1 losing change)", "normal lottery ( Special figure 2 Big hit winning lottery selection) Variable pattern distribution table "FH9 to FH12 (see "Hidden probability, during normal lottery" column in the figure)" is selected, and the "big hit winning state (special figure 1 In the case of "big hit variation)', the variation pattern distribution table "FH13 to FH16 (refer to the column of "potential probability, no lottery" in the figure)" for no lottery (No special lottery 2 big hit winning lottery) is selected. To be done.

(22-1-2: Features of fluctuation pattern distribution table for no lottery)
As shown in FIG. 36, the above “variation pattern distribution table for no lottery FH9 to FH12” has the following features as compared with the “variation pattern distribution table for normal lottery FH13 to FH16”. I have it. Hereinafter, the case of not being selected may be either a case of “variable pattern lottery but the selection rate is 0%” or a case of “excluding from the lottery target”.

(W) At least the reach variation pattern is not selected. In the case of the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-relational variation pattern are not selected, and only the normal variation pattern having a relatively low expectation of winning is selected (see, for example, tables FH13 to FH16). Therefore, a player participation type effect that requires a relatively long effect time width, a reach effect, and other notice effects with a high degree of inspiring the expectation of winning the jackpot, that is, a high expectation notice effect is not displayed. In particular, when the reach variation pattern is not selected, the appearance rate of the reach effect can be set to zero. The reach variation pattern selection rate may be set to a relatively low probability. (F) The selectivity of "short fluctuation pattern" (for example, normal fluctuation 2s, normal fluctuation 3s, etc.) having a relatively short fluctuation time is high. In other words, the selectivity of the "long fluctuation pattern", which has a relatively long fluctuation time, is low. Therefore, also in this case, as in the case of (wa), the high-anticipation notice effect is not displayed or is hardly displayed. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the selectivity of the shortest normal fluctuation 2s is high (for example, comparison between “FH10 and FH14” and “FH12 and FH16”). Therefore, the configuration for switching the variable pattern distribution table between the non-lottery and the normal lottery is better than the configuration in which the common variable pattern distribution table is referred to in the non-lottery and the normal lottery. The average digestion speed per game will increase.
In short, (wa) and (f) above, the variation pattern distribution table for non-lottery is a variation pattern with a relatively lower expectation of winning the jackpot than the variation pattern distribution table for normal lottery. Is a table structure that is easily selected. As a result, when there is no lottery, a low-anticipation notice effect that has a relatively low expectation of winning is more likely to appear (the appearance rate has a higher probability) than during a normal lottery, and a high-anticipation notice effect appears. It is hard to be done (the probability of appearance is low).

(Modified example of fluctuation pattern distribution table for non-lottery)
In the case of no lottery, as described above, paying attention to the technical idea of'making difficult to show the high-anticipation notice effect'or'not making the high-expectation notice effect appear', It may have a table structure.

(Y) In the case of no-lottery, it does not mean that “reach variation pattern is not selected” as in (wa) above. Instead, the variation pattern designated by N reach is selected, but the variation pattern designated by SP reach is The table configuration may be such that it is not selected (of the reach variation patterns, at least the reach variation pattern designated by SP reach is not selected). This is because the N-reach type (for example, latent N-reach in reach) has a shorter variation time and the winning expectation is lower than the SP reach type (for example, in-probability weak SP reach). In this case, even among the high-anticipation notice effects (for example, SP reach), the “extreme heat notice effect (for example, strong SP reach)” having a relatively high expectation degree is not displayed.
(Yo-1) Further, among the fluctuation pattern types at the time of losing, at least the fluctuation pattern having the highest expected win rate may not be selected. For example, in the case of latent accuracy, "normal fluctuation 2s to latent weak intermediate SP reach, fall avoidance reach reach" other than the latent strong medium SP reach can be selected. In this case, the intense heat notice effect does not appear or becomes difficult to appear. That is, this example is a form in which even the appearance of the intense heat notice effect is not excluded.

(T) In addition, in the case of no lottery, the "variation pattern distribution table for no lottery" may be used for both the case of losing and the case of small hit. For example, "FH13 (when holding is zero), FH14 (when holding is 1 to 3)" for loss A is not provided, and "FH15 (when holding is 0) and FH16 (when holding is 1 to 3) for small hits. Case)" can be combined.

(R) In addition, a table that does not depend on the number of operation-reserved balls may be used at the time of lottery. For example, "FH14" may be used in the case of the loss A, and "FH16" may be used in the case of the small hit, regardless of the number of operation suspension of the special figure 2. In this case, "FH14" or "FH16" may be used for both the loss A and the small hit.

(SO) In addition, the “variation pattern distribution table for no lottery FH11 to FH12” according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, changes common to the “variation pattern distribution table for normal lottery FH13 to FH16”. Although the pattern is defined, the present invention is not limited to this. The "variation pattern distribution table for normal lottery" and the "variation pattern distribution table for no-lottery" can define variation patterns of some different types or variation patterns of all different types. Specifically, the following configurations (So-1) to (So-2) can be adopted.
(So-1) In the “regular lottery variation pattern distribution table”, as shown in FIG. 36, a variation pattern “normal variation 2s to fall avoidance reach” is defined. However, in the “variation pattern distribution table for no lottery”, it is possible to define a variation pattern that is partially or wholly different from these. For example, one or a plurality of types of variation patterns can be set as the variation patterns dedicated to the non-lottery. Specifically, a variation pattern that does not correspond to any of the normal fluctuation 2 s to the fall avoidance reach gase, such as a “no-lottery normal fluctuation 2 s (variation time of 2 seconds)” and a “no-lottery N reach”, is prepared. In the "variation pattern distribution table for lottery", four types of normal variation 2s to normal variation 4s (common to common lottery) and no lottery normal variation 2s (only for lottery) may be set, or no lottery Only the normal fluctuation 2s may be set. In the case where the reach variation pattern is selectable, the “N lottery for no lottery” may be further included. In any case, the variation pattern distribution table for non-lottery has a table structure in which a variation pattern having a relatively low expectation of winning a jackpot is more easily selected than the variation pattern distribution table for normal lottery. can do.
(So-2) When the variation pattern exclusively for the non-lottery is selected, a notice effect that suggests or definitely informs that the result of the pattern variation display game on the back variation side is a big hit appears as a notice effect. Can be made. That is, the main production side on the front variation side can display the notice production regarding the game result on the back variation side.

(T) In case of no lottery, the player always loses or wins the small hit. Therefore, in any of the above (Wa) to (So-2), the big hit is definitely notified. The winning effect is not displayed, but the winning effect for notifying the small win is possible.

(Regarding other reasons for providing a variable pattern distribution table for non-lottery)
By the way, with respect to the above-mentioned "a configuration in which the variable pattern distribution table is switched between the time of no-drawing and the time of normal drawing, the average digestion speed per game is faster", there is also the following advantage. The details will be described below.

If the processing target this time is the special map 2 and the other special map 1 is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the special map 1 is “variation per 4 minutes in the latent probability” (game of FIG. 34). Corresponding to the column of the state type "latent probability", see the column "FB5" of "Special figure 1, common A (meaning common (combined) for big hits 1 to 4)). Therefore, it takes a maximum of 240 seconds until the change of the big hit in the special figure 1 is completed.

Here, the special figure 1 is a big hit means that if the big hit type is a big hit 1 (selection rate 5%) or a big hit 2 (selection rate 10%), it re-enters the latent state and re-enters it. Although there is a small hit rush, there is a possibility that the big hit 3 or the big hit 4 is won (in the case of the present embodiment, the probability of falling from the latent state is 85% (the selection ratio of the big hit 3 is 50%. , The jackpot 4 has a high selection rate of 35%) (see FIG. 4)). In addition, in the latent probability state, the special figure 1 side is the back fluctuation state (see FIG. 7), and in terms of performance, it is not notified which one of the big hits 1 to 4 has been won, and the player side Has no clue as to whether the variation in Toku-zu 1 is a jackpot variation or a loss variation.

However, in terms of game situation, in any case, the "small hit rush" ends due to the big hit winning of Special Figure 1. In particular, when the internal jackpot is 3 or 4 jackpots, it is not a latent hit transition trigger jackpot, so you can receive more jackpot lottery in the bonus chart 2 until the fluctuation of the bonus chart 1 ends. , Whether or not more small wins can be won will greatly affect the profits of future players.

However, even if the special figure 2 side is in the non-lottery state, if the long change pattern of the change time of several tens of seconds to minutes is unnecessarily selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2, the lottery on the special figure 2 side is selected. The chance to receive is lost for the variable time, and it greatly affects the profits to the player during the small hit rush.

However, as in this embodiment, in the case of no lottery, if the variation pattern distribution table (FH13 to FH16) dedicated to no lottery of FIG. 36 is selected, the short variation pattern is selected, so the player Does not suffer any disadvantage, and a game development useful for the player is given.

(22-2. Variation pattern distribution table selection process for special figure 1: step steps S453B to S455)
Next, the case where the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S451:=00H), that is, the case where the current processing target is the special figure 1 operation holding ball will be described.

In the process of step S453B, the variation pattern distribution table is determined by referring to the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 33 as in the case of the above-described special figure 2, but here, the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is turned ON. The change pattern distribution table that can be selected differs depending on the OFF state. In other words, the variable pattern distribution table that can be selected differs depending on whether or not the special figure 2 side has won the big hit.

Specifically, referring to FIG. 36, in the “probability change state” in which the special figure 1 is one of the table fluctuation states, when the symbol lottery result is “Loss A to C”, the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag Is not in the OFF state (00H), that is, when the other special figure 2 is in the big hit non-winning state (special figure 2 loss variation), it is "for normal lottery (special figure 1 big hit winning lottery) The variation pattern distribution table "FH17 to FH20 (see the column of "probable variation, normal lottery" shown in the figure)" is selected, while the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, the other When the special figure 2 is in the big hit winning state (special figure 2 big hit variation), the variation pattern distribution table “FH21 to FH24 (shown in the figure. Probability change, no lottery” column))” is to be selected. In addition, in the case of the'latent probability state' in which the special figure 1 is the back variation state, the common variation pattern distribution table “FH8” is selected regardless of the state of the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag. ing.

In this way, even when the current processing target is the special figure 1, the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag of the other special figure 2 is turned on and off (the big hit winning lottery result) as one of the selection conditions of the variation pattern. The reasons for setting are as follows.

If the special processing target of this time is special figure 1, and the other special figure 2 is a big hit, the big hit winning lottery of special figure 1 is not executed, and the winning lottery result is forced to be lost. (See FIGS. 20 and 21). Therefore, the symbol lottery result (step S415 of FIG. 18) is any of the losses A to C.

Under the situation of no lottery, for example, if the “variable pattern distribution table “FH17 to FH20” for normal lottery” shown in FIG. "Probability variation medium weak SP reach (variation time 30 seconds)" or "Probability variation medium strong SP reach (variation time 40 seconds)" is selected, resulting in a game situation in which the progress of the game is unnecessarily delayed. Also, in the situation of no-lottery, the notice effect (for example, high-reliability effect such as SP reach) that fuels the big hit is meaninglessly fueled by the player's expectation and tension. It has little meaning to make it appear.

In view of such a situation, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. 33, as with the case of the special map 2 described above, the special pattern 1 is also selected during normal lottery or no lottery. The configuration is such that a variation pattern distribution table can be selected depending on whether there is one. Specifically, if the current gaming state is a probability change state, and the other special map 2 is in the "big hit non-winning state (special map 2 losing change)", "at the time of normal lottery (special map 1 big hit winning lottery The variation pattern distribution table "FH17 to FH20" for "Yes" is selected, and in the case of "big hit winning state (special figure 2 big hit varying)", a variation pattern with a long fluctuation time is not selected. The fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH21 to FH24” for no lottery (no special lottery 1 big hit winning lottery) is selected.

With reference to FIG. 35, the above “variation pattern distribution table for no lottery FH21 to FH24” according to the present embodiment is compared with the above “variation pattern distribution table for normal lottery FH21 to FH24” It has the following characteristics. This will be described with a focus on the “no-lottery variation pattern distribution tables FH19 and FH20” and the “no-lottery variation pattern distribution tables FH23 and FH24” that are selected at the time of losing B and C. To do.

The “non-lottery variation pattern distribution tables FH23 and FH24” have the same features as (1) described in the above-mentioned “(22-X: Features of non-lottery variation pattern distribution table)”. Reach fluctuation patterns are not selected, and (2) short fluctuation patterns having a relatively short fluctuation time (here, normal fluctuation 1 s) have high selectivity. Further, (3) in the case of no lottery, it is not that "no reach variation pattern is selected", but a variation pattern designated by N reach is selected, but a variation pattern designated by SP reach is not selected. May be

In the present embodiment, the “variation pattern distribution tables for normal lottery F17 and F18” that are selected at the time of loss A (holding 0 loss A, hold 1-3 loss A) of the loss types and “at the time of no lottery” The variation pattern distribution tables F21, FH22" for use in the same configuration have the same configuration as shown in FIG. 35, but the variation pattern distribution tables F17, F18 for normal lottery also cause a loss B or C. Similar to FH19 and FH20 to be selected, a variation pattern for designating "7 patterns in the probable change" or "reach" may be provided, and the selection rate thereof can be appropriately determined. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of loses A to C are provided, but one type may be provided. In this case, for example, “F19” is selected as the variation pattern distribution table for normal lottery, and no lottery is performed. “FH23” may be adopted as the hourly variation pattern distribution table. Also in this case, it is possible to exhibit the above-mentioned characteristics of the variation pattern distribution table for non-lottery and the effects thereof.

(22-3. Selection of fluctuation pattern at setting error)
During the setting error, as described above, "miss" is always determined. Specifically, any one of the losses A to C is determined on the special figure 1 side, and the loss A is determined on the special figure 2 side. Therefore, this case is a case where the game is practically forcibly lost, which is the same as the above-mentioned “under the situation at the time of no lottery” (see FIGS. 20 and 21). Therefore, when the game state is a probability change state or a setting error during the latent probability state (when the setting error flag is in the ON state), it is possible to select the variation pattern distribution table for the non-lottery. ..

(Variation example of variation pattern selection at setting error)
A "variation pattern distribution table for setting error" that is selected only when a setting error occurs may be provided. In this case, it is possible to provide a variation pattern distribution table (for special figure 1 and special figure 2) for setting error according to the special symbol type. Here, during a setting error, it is forcibly lost.Therefore, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for setting errors, as in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for no-lottery, there is a high degree of fanning. It is preferable to have a table configuration in which a variation pattern designating an effect (a high-anticipation notice effect or the like) is not selected. In consideration of this point, for example, the following configurations (T) to (N) can be adopted.
(T) At least do not select the reach variation pattern.
(N) At least the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-relational variation pattern are not selected.
(D) At least a variation pattern designated by SP reach is not selected. In this case, the reach variation designated by N reach and the normal variation pattern can be selected.
In the case of the above (tsu) or (ne), it is possible to select a normal fluctuation pattern according to the number of operation holding balls (the number of operation holding balls after subtraction). For example, a normal fluctuation of 12 s can be selected when the number of operation holding balls is 1, a normal fluctuation of 8 s when the number of operation holding balls is 2, a normal fluctuation of 4 s when the number of operation holding balls is 3, and the like. .. Further, it is possible to select only a specific normal fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of operation-reserving balls. However, the particular normal fluctuation pattern is not particularly limited, and for example, a fluctuation pattern having the longest fluctuation time (10 minutes fluctuation) may be selected, or a fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time (for example, normal fluctuation 2s). May be selected, or another normal fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 12s) may be selected. Further, as the specific normal variation pattern, a normal variation pattern dedicated to a setting error may be provided. In addition, it is preferable to apply the above (1) to (3) in any of the cases of the loss A to C. In addition, as described above, the “difference D” that is selected only when the setting error occurs is provided, and when the deviation D is selected, the dedicated variation pattern distribution table during the setting error error (variation pattern allocation for setting error) Minute table) can be selected.

Further, it is preferable that the variation pattern designation command during the setting abnormality error (hereinafter referred to as “variation pattern designation command for setting abnormality”) includes information capable of identifying the variation pattern for the setting abnormality error. .. The production control unit 24 can recognize that a setting abnormality error has occurred by receiving the “setting value abnormality command” transmitted in step S064 of FIG. 27, but this command is exclusively used for error notification. Is a command used for. For this reason, the effect control unit 24 causes the effect control unit 24 to set the variation pattern designation command sent this time by including information for identifying that the variation pattern designation command for setting abnormality is selected at the time of the setting abnormality error. By grasping that the variation pattern has been selected during the abnormal error, it is possible to execute the effect control related to the decorative pattern variable display game dedicated to the abnormal setting error.

For example, it can be configured to execute a decorative symbol variable display game such as the following (C) to (C).
(C) The notice production itself is not displayed during the setting error. For example, as the image display effect, only the background image display (background image corresponding to the effect mode) and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are not related to the winning expectation degree are performed.
(ヰ) The variable display of the decorative pattern is not displayed. In this case, the variable display operation of the special symbol is executed, but the decorative symbol remains stopped. The fourth symbol 157 (decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol) and the fourth symbol 159 (decorative symbol 2 4th symbol) in the dedicated display area 160 may be variably displayed, or may be left in a stopped state. ..
(No) A variation display (variation display during RAM error) dedicated for setting error is displayed. For example, the "fluctuation fluctuation" of swinging the decorative pattern up and down is performed without starting the normal fluctuation display. In this case, the swing fluctuation may be performed with a specific combination of symbols (for example, a lost symbol such as “2”, “4”, “0”, etc.).
(Y) The normal variation display is performed, but when the stop display is performed, the stop display is performed by a specific symbol combination (for example, a lost symbol such as “2” “4” “0”), or the normal variation is displayed. After the display, the swing fluctuation (temporary stop state) is performed for a predetermined time with a specific symbol combination.
(C) Change from a normal decorative design to a dedicated decorative design during a setting error. For example, a normal decorative design is a design displaying numbers 1 to 9, but a dedicated decorative design during a setting error is changed to a design displaying characters such as "d", "la", and "-".

<23. Special symbol fluctuation processing: Figure 23>
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S304 (corresponding to special figure 1), S309 (corresponding to special figure 2)) in the special symbol management process 1 in FIG. 15 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process of FIG.

In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines whether the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (special target 1 is the processing target) or 01H (special target 2 is the processing target) (step S471). If the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S471: = 00H), then it is determined whether or not the "special symbol 1 operation timer 1" is zero (step S472). The special symbol 1 operation timer here is set to the variation time (remaining variation time) of the special symbol 1. If the special symbol 1 operation timer is not zero (step S472: ≠ 0), the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 has not yet passed, that is, the special symbol 1 is changing, so this special symbol variation without doing anything. The middle processing (here, the special object 1 is the processing target step S304) is exited. On the other hand, if the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 has become zero (step S472:=0), "special symbol 1 changing process" shown in FIG. 24, which will be described later, is executed (step S473).

In the determination processing of step S471, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (special figure 2 is the processing target) (step S471:=01H), then, "special symbol 2 operation timer 1" is zero or not. Is determined (step S474). The special symbol 2 operation timer here is set to the variable time (remaining variable time) of the special symbol 2. If the special symbol 2 operation timer is not zero (step S474: ≠ 0), the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 has not yet passed, that is, the special symbol 2 is changing, so this special symbol variation without doing anything. The middle processing (here, the special figure 2 is the processing target step S309) is exited. On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 becomes zero (step S474:=0), the "special symbol 2 changing process" shown in FIG. 25 described later is executed (step S475).

<24. Special symbol 1 processing during fluctuation: Figure 24>
Next, the special symbol 1 variation process (step S473) in FIG. 23 will be described. 24 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol 1 variation process of FIG.

In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first transmits a decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command “BF01H” (special figure 1 normal fluctuation stop command) to the effect control unit 24 (step S481). The effect control unit 24 side that has received this decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command grasps that the special symbol variable display game 1 has ended after the variation time of the special symbol 1 is being displayed and is currently displayed in a variable manner (table variation). In the case of), the decorative design (decorative design 1) corresponding to the special drawing 1 and the fourth design 157 in the dedicated display area 160 are stopped and displayed (fixed display). As a result, when the special symbol variable display game 1 ends, the decorative symbol variable display game 1 also ends. The decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command “BF11H” transmitted in step S498 of FIG. 25 described later is a command having the same function as the above-mentioned decorative symbol 1 4th symbol stop command “BF01H”, The former is a command that works as a "normal fluctuation stop command" that is transmitted when the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 becomes zero, and the latter is the decorative symbol 1 and the fourth symbol 157 which are changing during forced loss. It is a command that works as a "special figure 1 forced stop command" for forcibly stopping and displaying.

Then, as a setting process when the fluctuation of special figure 1 is stopped, the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "determining (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol 1 operation status), and the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 is confirmed and displayed. Time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to the OFF state (00H) (step S482). When the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to the OFF state, the stop display is started in the subsequent special symbol display data updating process (step S335 in FIG. 16). Therefore, at this stage, not exactly the stop display stage of the special symbol (here, the special symbol 1), but the control signal based on the display data in the LED management process (step S098) through the special symbol display data update process. It is output to the special symbol display device to start the stop display, and the stop display is continued until the fixed display time elapses.

Next, the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S483). Here, it is determined whether or not the Toku-zu 1 has won the small hit, but in the case of the present embodiment, the small hit is excluded from the jackpot lottery target on the Toku-zu 1 side, so the determination result of step S483. Is always “≠5AH”.

(Special symbol 2 forced loss setting process; steps S485 to S489)
Then, the state of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is determined (step S485). If the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S485: ≠ 5AH), the special symbol 1 changing process is exited without doing anything.

If the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is ON (5AH) (step S485:=5AH), the special symbol stop 1 flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S486).

Next, the state of the special symbol 2 changing flag is determined (step S487). If the special symbol 2 changing flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S487: ≠5AH), the special symbol 2 is not changing, and the special symbol 1 changing process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 fluctuating flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S487:=5AH), in order to forcibly stop the fluctuating special symbol 2, the special symbol 2 forced loss setting process of steps S488 to S489 is performed. To do.

In the special symbol 2 forced loss setting process, first, the decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command "BF12H" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S488). The effect control unit 24 side that received the decorative symbol 2 4th symbol stop command grasps that the special symbol variable display game 2 has ended after the variation time of the special symbol 2 is being displayed and is currently displayed in a variable manner (by table variation). In some cases, the decorative pattern (decorative pattern 2) corresponding to special map 2 (the decorative pattern 2) and the fourth symbol 159 in the dedicated display area 160 are stopped and displayed (determined display). As a result, with the end of the special symbol variable display game 2, the decorative symbol variable display game 2 is also terminated. Therefore, the "decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command" transmitted here works as a "special symbol 2 forced stop command" for forcibly displaying the changing "decorative symbol 2 4th symbol".

Then, various setting processing at the time of special symbol 2 forced loss is performed (step S489). Specifically, the special symbol 2 operation status is switched to “determining (03H)” (stores 03H in the special symbol 2 operation status), and the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 (special figure 2 variable time management timer) is cleared to zero. , Set the fixed display time (500ms) to the special symbol 2 operation timer 2, set the special symbol 2 changing flag to the OFF state (store 00H), and set the small hit determination flag to the OFF state (store 00H) Then, the special symbol 2 stop symbol number is set to "200 (special stop symbol number corresponding to the loss A on the special symbol 2 side)".

When the processing in step S489 is completed as described above, the special symbol 1 changing process is exited. Then, through the special symbol changing process (step S309), the process proceeds to step S306 of the special symbol management process 1 of FIG.

<25. Special symbol 2 processing during fluctuation: Figure 25>
Next, the special symbol 2 changing process (step S475) in FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol 2 changing process of FIG. The special symbol 2 changing process (step S475) is basically the same as the special symbol 1 changing process (step S473), except that the special symbol type of the processing target is different. .. Therefore, in FIG. 25, the description of the contents substantially the same as those described with reference to FIG. 24 will be appropriately omitted to avoid redundant description.

In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first transmits a decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command “BF02H” (special figure 2 normal fluctuation stop command) to the effect control unit 24 (step S491). The effect control unit 24 side receiving this decorative symbol 2 4th symbol stop command grasps that the special symbol variation display game 2 has ended after the variation time of the special symbol 2 is currently displayed in a variation display (table variation). In the case of), the decorative design (decorative design 2) corresponding to the special drawing 2 and the fourth design 159 in the dedicated display area 160 are stopped (fixed display). As a result, with the end of the special symbol variable display game 2, the decorative symbol variable display game 2 is also terminated. Note that the decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command “BF02H” transmitted in this processing has the same function as the decorative symbol 2 4th symbol stop command “BF12H” transmitted in step S488 of FIG. 24 described above. Although it is a command, the former is a command that works as a "normal fluctuation stop command" that is transmitted when the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 becomes zero, and the latter is a decorative symbol 2 that is changing during forced loss. And, it is a command that works as a "special figure 2 forced stop command" for forcibly stopping and displaying the fourth symbol 159.

Then, as a setting process when the fluctuation of special figure 2 is stopped, the special symbol 2 operation status is switched to "determining (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol 2 operation status), and the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 is confirmed and displayed. The time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the special symbol 2 changing flag is set to the OFF state (00H) (step S492).

Next, the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S493). If the small hit determination flag is not in the ON state (5 AH) (step S493:≠5 AH), the process proceeds to the determination process of step S495. On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S493:=5AH), it is determined that the small hit symbol has stopped, and the special symbol stop 2 flag is set in the ON state (5AH) (step S494).

(Special symbol 1 forced loss setting process; steps S495 to S499)
Then, the state of the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is determined (step S495). If the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S495: ≠ 5AH), the special symbol 2 changing process is exited without doing anything.

If the special symbol 2 big hit determination flag is ON (5AH) (step S495: = 5AH), the special symbol stop 1 flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S496).

Next, the state of the special symbol 1 changing flag is determined (step S497). If the special symbol 1 changing flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S497: ≠5AH), the special symbol 1 is not changing, and nothing is done and the special symbol 2 changing process is exited. On the other hand, if the special symbol 1 changing flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S497:=5AH), in order to forcibly stop the changing special symbol 1, the special symbol 1 forced loss setting process of steps S498 to S499 is performed. To do.

In the special symbol 1 forced loss setting process, first, the decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command "BF11H" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S498).

Next, the special symbol 1 compulsory loss setting is performed (step S499). Here, as various setting processing at the time of special symbol 1 forced loss, the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "determining (03H)" (stores 03H in the special symbol 1 operation status), special symbol 1 operation timer 1 (special Figure 1 Fluctuating time management timer) is cleared to zero, the fixed display time (500 ms) is set for the special symbol 1 operation timer 2, the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to the OFF state (00H is stored), and the special symbol 1 is stopped. In the symbol number, the stop symbol number for designating the loss type (any of the losses A to C) determined in the special stop symbol creating process (step S415 of FIG. 18) is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbols 1 and 2 are being displayed in parallel in parallel, when the variation time of one special symbol ends and is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the variable display The change time of the other special symbol in the inside is forcibly ended (the change time is set to zero), and the forced stop control for stopping and displaying the other special symbol with a lost symbol is performed. In addition, when the variation time of one special symbol ends first and is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol, the measurement interruption control for interrupting the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol during the variation display is performed. Further, during the interruption of the measurement, the changing flag is not set to the OFF state, that is, it is treated as “during changing display”.

Then, of the special symbols 1 and 2, if one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed first with a big hit symbol, and the other special symbol that is changing is stopped with a lost symbol, "forced loss stop control" is performed. Before the display time starts, that is, when the variation time of the one special symbol ends (when the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is zero, or when the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is zero), the other special symbol It is controlled so that it is forcibly stopped with a lost design. The reason for controlling in this way is as follows, during the confirmed display time (when the confirmed display time starts to when the confirmed display elapses), if the other special symbol is forcibly stopped with a missing symbol, it is as follows. This is because problems will occur.

For example, if Toku-zu 1 is a big hit change and Toku-zu 2 is a small hit change in parallel, the Toku-zu 1 is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol first, and the special display is displayed within 500 ms of the fixed display period. There may be a case where 2 is stopped and displayed as a small hit pattern. In this case, not only the overlapping period in which the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed at the same time occurs, but on the special map 1 side which is stopped first, the big hit game occurs after the fixed display time elapses, and during the big hit game. Inappropriate display state occurs in the special symbol display devices 38a, 38b that the small hit symbol of special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the process related to the forced loss stop is to be executed at the timing when the variable time ends (the determination result of step S472 or S474 of FIG. 23 is “=0”, the special symbol of FIGS. 24 to 25). (1) Processing during fluctuation, refer to Special symbol 2 Processing during fluctuation).

Further, in the present embodiment, one special symbol (here, special figure 2) is stopped and displayed first with a small hit symbol, and the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (here, special figure 1) is changing. In the case of performing the measurement interruption control for interrupting, the "special symbol stop 2 flag" is not set after the fixed display time elapses, but when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 ends (the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 When it becomes zero), the "special symbol stop 2 flag" is set (steps S493 to S494), and the timer interruption process of FIG. 14 is to execute the measurement interruption process for the special figure 1. (Processing route of'=5AH' in step S535). The reason for controlling in this way is that if the special symbol stop 2 flag is set between the start of the fixed display time and the passage of the fixed display, the following problem will occur.

For example, if the special figure 2 is currently showing a small hit change and the special figure 1 is showing a big change in parallel, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the small hit pattern first, and the special display is carried out within 500 ms of the fixed display period. A case may occur in which FIG. 1 is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern. In this case, since the variation time of Toku-zu 1 has already passed, the measurement interruption process for the variation time of Toku-zu 1 can no longer be performed. Therefore, also in this case, the problem of the same phenomenon as in the above-mentioned “forced loss stop” case occurs. That is, an overlap period occurs in which the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed at the same time, and on the special map 2 side that stopped earlier, the small hit game occurs after the fixed display time has elapsed, and the special hit during the small hit game. The jackpot symbol of FIG. 1 is stopped and displayed, which causes an inappropriate display state in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. For this reason, the process related to the interruption of the measurement at the time of a small hit is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 ends (the determination result of step S472 or S474 of FIG. 23 is “=0”, FIG. 25). Steps S493 to S494 of the special symbol 2 changing process, and the processing route of “=5AH” of step S535 of the timer management process of FIG. 14).

In the case of performing the above "forced loss stop control" or "measurement interruption control", in any case, not at the time of the fixed display, at the timing when the variable time of the special symbol ends (when the variable time ends ), the necessary processing is performed. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent an inappropriate display state.

When the processing of step S499 is completed as described above, the special symbol 2 changing process is exited. Then, the special symbol changing process (step S309) is exited, and the special symbol management process 1 of FIG. 15 is exited.

<26. Special symbol confirmation time processing: Figure 26A, Figure 26B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time process (step S305 (corresponding to special figure 1), S310 (corresponding to special figure 2)) in FIG. 15 will be described. 26A to 26B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time process.

In FIG. 26A, the CPU 201 first determines whether the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (special target 1 is the processing target) or 01H (special target 2 is the processing target) (step S501).

If the special figure operation confirmation data is 00H (step S501:=00H), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 is zero (step S502), and the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 is not zero. If so (step S502: ≠0), it is determined that the confirmed display time has not elapsed, and the special symbol confirmation time is ended without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 becomes zero (step S502:=0), it is determined that the confirmation display of the special symbol 1 is finished, and the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" ( (01H is stored in the special symbol 1 operation status) (step S503), and the process proceeds to the determination process of step S504.

On the other hand, if the special figure operation confirmation data is 01H (step S501: = 01H), then it is determined whether the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 is zero (step S508), the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 is If it is not zero (step S508: ≠0), it is determined that the confirmed display time has not elapsed, and the processing is ended during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 has become zero (step S508:=0), as the confirmation display of the special symbol 2 is completed, the special symbol 2 operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" ( The special symbol 1 operation status stores 01H) (step S509), and proceeds to the determination process of step S504.

Hereinafter, in the processing of steps S504 to S521, the processing based on the special figure operation confirmation data is performed, but basically the same processing content is different only in the special symbol type to be processed. Therefore, in the following, the case where the processing target is the special figure 1 (special figure operation confirmation data is 00H) will be representatively described, and the description regarding the case where the processing target is the special figure 2 is appropriately omitted to avoid redundant description.

In step S504, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the big hit determination flag on the current processing target side (special symbol 1 big hit determination flag in the case of Toku-zu 1, special symbol 2 big hit determination flag in the case of Toku-zu 2) The state is determined (step S504). Here, since the case where the processing target is the special figure 1 (special figure operation confirmation data is 00H) has been described, the state of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is determined.

(When the big hit determination flag is ON: steps S505 to S507)
When the jackpot determination flag is determined to be the "ON state (5AH)" in the determination of step S504 (step S504:=5AH), various setting processing when the jackpot symbol is stopped is performed (step S505). Here, as various setting processing when the big hit symbols are stopped (pre-start processing of the big hit game), processing for designating the gaming state during the big hit game is performed. Specifically, as shown in the figure, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag. Also, the test signal jackpot determination flag is set to the ON state (5 AH). The test signal jackpot determination flag is a flag used when a model test signal is output (test firing test signal terminal management process during performance display monitor process described later (see steps S823 and 29 in FIG. 28)). If the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), it indicates that the big hit game is in progress, and if the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), it indicates that the big hit game is not in progress. The big hit determination flag is provided with a special symbol 1 big hit determination flag for the test signal corresponding to special figure 1, and a special symbol 2 big hit determination flag for the test signal corresponding to special figure 2. Here, the processing target Since it is the special figure 1, the special symbol for the test signal 1 big hit determination flag is set to the ON state (5AH), and here, the big hit determination flag and flags of various functions are set to the OFF state (00H). The game state during the game is designated as "low probability/no electric support", and the special symbol time saving counter and the special symbol probability variation counter are cleared to zero (00H is stored).

Next, the special electric auditors product operation timer is set to 5000 ms as the winning combination gate effective waiting time (step S506). The winning combination gate effective waiting time is an interval section until the detection of the game ball by the winning combination gate sensor 57a is set to the valid state after the jackpot is fixed after the confirmation display time of the special symbol has passed, and the opening. It refers to the time width that defines the production section (big hit start production and right-handed instruction production). Therefore, until the winning combination gate valid waiting time elapses, the detection of the winning combination gate switch 57a is disabled, and the round game is not started even if the game ball passes through the winning combination gate.

Next, a combination gate operation interval start command (ED01H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S507). The winning combination gate operation interval start command includes information capable of specifying the type of big hit this time and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. On the side of the effect control unit 24, the big hit start effect according to the kind of big hit this time and It is used when starting right-handed instruction production. When the above processing is completed, the special symbol confirmation time is ended.

(When the big hit determination flag is OFF: steps S510 to S521)
When it is determined in the determination in step S504 that the big hit determination flag is in the "OFF state (00H)" (step S504: ≠5AH), the small hit determination flag is acquired and the small hit determination on the processing target side this time is performed. The state of the flag (special symbol 1 small hit determination flag in the case of special figure 1 and special symbol 2 small hit determination flag in the case of special figure 2) is determined (step S510). In the case of this embodiment, since there is no small hit prize on the special figure 1 side, only the state of the special symbol 2 small hit determination flag (small hit determination flag) of the special figure 2 is actually determined.

When the small hitting determination flag is in the OFF state (=00H) (step S510:≠5AH), the process proceeds to step S512. When the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (=5 AH) (step S510:=5 AH), various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S511). Here, as a pre-start process of the small hit game when the special symbol indicating the small hit is stopped, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit medium flag. .. This small hitting flag is a flag that designates whether or not a small hitting game is in progress. When the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), it indicates that the small hitting game is in progress, and the flag is OFF. In the state (=00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not in progress. Further, here, the test signal small hit determination flag is set to the ON state (5 AH). The test signal small hit determination flag is a flag used when the model test signal is output, similarly to the test signal large hit determination flag (test firing test signal terminal management process in FIG. 28 described later). (S823), see FIG. 29), when the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), it indicates that the small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), the small hit game. Indicates that it is not inside. After finishing the various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped, the process proceeds to step S512.

Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time saving counter (the number of times of the special symbol time saving state) is zero (step S512). If the special symbol time saving counter is zero (step S512:=0), the process proceeds to step S517 without doing anything.

If the special symbol time reduction counter is not zero (step S512: ≠0), the special symbol time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step S513) as the digestion of the current variation number (step S513), and the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero. Is determined (step S514).

If the special symbol time saving counter after subtraction is not zero (step S514:≠0), since the number of times the special symbol saving time has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S517 without doing anything.

If the special symbol time saving counter after subtraction is zero (step S514:=0), the number of times the special symbol time saving state ends (in the present embodiment, 7 times (in the case of time saving B) or 50 times (in the case of time saving A)) ) Is reached, the setting process at the end of time saving is performed (step S515). Here, as the setting process at the time saving end, 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the general electric outlet opening state flag, the normal symbol time saving state flag, the normal symbol probability changing state flag, and the special symbol time saving state flag. As a result, from the next game, it will be placed under the "state without electric support" to which electric cho support is not added.

When the setting process at the time saving end in step S515 is completed, the game state information transmission process (FIG. 19) is executed (step S516). Since the status command transmitted in the game status information transmission process includes the remaining time saving number information, the effect control unit 24 shifts from the next game to the normal state after the time saving state ends in the present symbol variable display game. If it is understood that the next game (the first game after the transition to the normal state) is started, the above "result effect" is displayed, and in the second game, the "launch position guide effect (left-handed instruction effect)" is displayed. )” is displayed (see (12) and (13) in FIG. 31E).

Next, when proceeding to the process of step S517, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST number) is zero (step S517).

If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S517: = 0), exit the process during the special symbol confirmation time. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S517: ≠ 0), as the variation number digest of this special symbol, the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S518), and the special symbol after the subtraction It is determined whether the probability variation counter is zero (step S519).

If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S519:≠0), the ST prescribed number of times has not been reached, so the process during this special symbol confirmation time ends. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S519:=0), the number of variations of the special symbol has reached the ST specified number (65535 times in the present embodiment), and is set at the time of the probability variation end. Processing is performed (step S520). Here, as a transition setting process to the normal game state accompanying the end of the latent probability state or the end of the probability variation state, the universal electric opener extended state flag, normal symbol time saving state flag, normal symbol probability changing state flag, special symbol time saving state flag, And 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the special symbol probability change state flags. As a result, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state. In addition, in the case of the present embodiment, since the ST prescribed number of times is 65,535, the latent probability state or the probable variation state is substantially continued until the next big hit.

When the setting process at the end of the probability change of step S520 is finished, the game state information transmission process (FIG. 19) is executed (step S521), and the process during the special symbol confirmation time is exited.

As described above, when the process during the special symbol confirmation time ends, the special symbol management process 1 (FIG. 15) in step S093 shown in FIG. 13 is exited, and then the special symbol management process 2 (step S094 in FIG. 16). ) Is executed.

<28. Performance display monitor process: Fig. 28>
Next, the performance display monitor process (step S101) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of the performance display monitor process.

In the present embodiment, the operation program and the storage area for the processing related to performance display are defined in the out-of-area memory (second memory area). Therefore, in FIG. 28, in order to execute the process related to the performance display, the CPU 201 first saves the stack pointer related to the in-region RAM (step S821) and executes the process such as setting the stack pointer related to the out-of-region RAM. (Step S822).

Next, a test-firing test signal terminal management process related to the test signal output process to the test-firing test device is executed (step S823). Details of this test-firing test signal terminal management processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an out-of-area RAM check process for checking whether or not the stored data relating to the performance display of the in-area RAM is damaged (step S824). Details of this out-of-area RAM check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 30A.

Next, the outside area LED management processing is executed (step S825). In the area outside LED management processing, output control of a control signal (dynamic lighting data) is performed on the performance indicator 99 based on display data created in step S831 described later. In the area outside LED management processing, the data set in the output buffer for the identification display unit and the output buffer for the base display unit set in step S831 at the time of the previous interruption is output to the performance display 99, and the identification display unit and the data display are displayed. Controls the display of parts. The identification display unit output buffer and the base display unit output buffer are for storing each display pattern data of the identification display unit and the base display unit, and these are provided in the RAM outside the area. The area outside LED management processing may be executed after the display update processing (step S831) described later. Further, the output of the control signal to the performance indicator 99 may use the LED management process (step S098) of FIG.

(Processing regarding operation confirmation display: processing route from step S826 to S833)
Next, it is determined whether or not the operation confirmation timer is zero, that is, whether or not the operation confirmation time of 5000 ms at power-on has elapsed (step S826). When the operation confirmation timer is not zero (step S826:≠0), the operation confirmation processing for performing the operation confirmation display (all blinking) at power-on is executed (step S833). Note that, as described above, the operation confirmation display is set because the operation confirmation timer is set in the operation confirmation timer setting process (step S033 in FIG. 8B) which is a part of the process when the power is turned on. If the power is cut off during confirmation, the operation check timer is initialized when the power is restored instead of restarting the operation check from the state when the power was cut off, and the operation check time of 5000 ms elapses again. The operation confirmation display will be displayed until. Details of this operation confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30B.

(Processing for normal display: processing route of steps S826→S827)
On the other hand, when the operation confirmation timer is zero (step S826:=0), it is determined that the operation confirmation display is completed, and the normal display process (steps S828 to S831) for displaying the performance information on the performance indicator 99 is performed. I will go.

First, 00H is set to the normal state determination flag (step S827). The normal state determination flag is a flag for designating whether or not it is a “measurement target section” for measuring the performance information (base value in this embodiment). In the case of the present embodiment, when the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), it indicates that the measurement target section (during normal state) is present, and when the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), measurement is not performed. It indicates that it is a target section (a game state other than the normal state).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal state (step S828), and if it is the normal state (step S828: YES), the normal state determination flag is set to the ON state (5AH) ( In step S829), this specifies that the section is a measurement target section. However, if it is not in the normal state (step S828: NO), nothing is done, that is, the normal state determination flag remains in the OFF state (00H), and the process proceeds to step S830. Therefore, in this case, the normal state determination flag is maintained in the OFF state, and the fact that the current game state is the non-measurement target section is designated.

By the way, in the RAM outside the area, a storage area for managing the same data as the current game state information managed by the RAM inside the area (in the present embodiment, the game state number YJ corresponds) is provided, and also in the RAM outside the area. The gaming state number YJ may be managed, and when it is determined whether or not it is the normal state in step S828, the value of the YJ may be acquired and the determination process may be performed. However, in this case, even though the same data is managed in the RAM in the area, duplicated identical data is managed in the RAM 203, and the memory outside the area is unnecessarily pressed to increase the control load. .. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, access to the in-area RAM is not prohibited when executing the processing related to the out-of-area memory (the processing related to performance display, etc.), and the RAM is required by a legal request. Since the usage capacity and the like are severely limited, it is preferable to suggest a memory capacity as much as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RAM outside the area does not have a storage area for managing the current game state information (game state number YJ), and the game state number YJ on the side of the RAM in the area is acquired, so that the normal state is obtained. It is adapted to determine whether or not there is any.

Next, a switch input data setting process is executed (step S828). In the switch input data setting process, the switch input data acquired in step S082, specifically, the middle starting port sensor 34a, the right starting port sensor 33a, the lower right starting port sensor 35a, the upper winning a prize sensor 42a, the lower large Based on the respective input data of the winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the OUT monitoring switch 49a, the input data relating to the presence or absence of winning for each winning opening is created. The data created here is used to count the number of regular payouts, the number of regular outs, the base value, and the total number of outs in the performance display monitor tabulation division processing (step S022) of FIG.

Next, the LED display data for displaying the base value obtained in the performance display monitor total division processing (step S040) of FIG. 8A on the performance display 99 is updated (step S829: display data update processing). , LED output buffers such as an identification display output buffer and a data display output buffer. The data created here is output by the outside LED management processing (step S825) at the next interruption. As a result, the display of the performance information of the performance indicator 99 is realized.

Then, the contents of the saved registers are restored to exit the performance display monitor process. As a result, real-time display of the performance information (in this embodiment, the current base value (real-time base value) and the previous history information (history base value)) is realized on the performance display 99. As described above, the process of FIG. 28 functions as an information display control unit that controls the performance indicator 99 based on the information display control program. In the present embodiment, the RAM in the area of the RAM 202 is provided with a game information storage area capable of storing game state data (in the present embodiment, game state number YJ) for specifying the current game state. The RAM 2 outside the area of the RAM 202 is provided with a specific information storage area capable of storing specific data indicating a specific game state (for example, a normal state) (step S829). The information display control means, based on the game state data (game state number YJ) stored in the game information storage area of the RAM in the area, the current game state is a specific game state (in the present embodiment, a normal state). (YJ=00H) determining means for determining whether or not (step S828), and when the determining means determines that the game state is a specific game state, the specific data storage area stores the specific data. Information storage means (step S829), calculation means (S040, S830 in FIG. 8B) for calculating specific information (base value) related to the game result based on the specific data, and specific information calculated by the calculation means Display control means (S825, S831 in FIG. 28) for controlling the display of information on the performance display 99.

<29. Test firing test signal terminal management process: FIG. 29>
Next, the test shot test signal terminal management process (step S822) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing details of the test-fire test signal terminal management process.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine in which a third-party testing institution (designated testing institution based on the provisions of Article 20, Paragraph 5 of the Act on Regulations of Customs Business and Optimization of Businesses) is appropriate. Corresponding to the type test for determining whether or not it is configured, a "type test signal" capable of specifying the control state of the gaming machine can be output from the frame external terminal board 21. In addition, the gaming machine provided to perform the type test is provided with a dedicated connection terminal (testing test equipment information terminal) for connecting to the testing device, and input/output of test signals between the gaming machine and the testing device. It is possible to carry out the type test. In addition, when installing a gaming machine that conforms to the type test in the pachinko hall, no modification of the matching control program is allowed, so even after the installation in the pachinko hall, the test firing test signal terminal management processing in step S822 is performed. Although it will be repeatedly executed for each interrupt, the above-mentioned dedicated connection terminal is not mounted on the game machine for mass production, so that it cannot be used as an outer end signal for the data counter DT or the hall computer HC. It has become. Therefore, the type test signal is different from the outer end signal such as the big hit medium signal or the short time big hit medium signal.

In this test-firing test signal terminal management process, the game information (test information) necessary for the type test is stored in a RAM outside the area in a 1-byte-long external output buffer (corresponding to test-firing test equipment information terminal ports 1 to 5). It acquires and supplies the information (for example, ON/OFF information of the flag) to the 8-bit output port (testing test equipment information terminal ports 1 to 5) and outputs various test information to the outside as a model test signal. It is like this. In the present embodiment, as the test information, the game information of the following first information to fifth information is acquired, and these pieces of information can be output from the test-shooting test device information terminals (test-shooting test device information terminal ports 1 to 5). Has become. The CPU 201 acquires various data stored in the RAM in the area (flags stored according to the processing state of normal game progress) and transmits game information necessary for the type test to the test device. ing.

In FIG. 29, the CPU 201 first executes first information acquisition processing for acquiring the first information (step S601). This first information, as shown in the figure, a specific error type flag (b0), a normal symbol per flag (b1), a normal symbol probability variation flag (b2), a normal symbol time saving state flag (b3), a normal electric accessory It is an operating flag (b4), a universal electric officer open extension state flag (b5), a normal symbol changing flag (b6), and a special symbol for the test signal 2 small hit flag (b7). Note that b7 to b0 in parentheses (most significant bit b7 to least significant bit b0) indicate bit numbers corresponding to each information (the same applies to second information to fifth information described below).

In the first information acquisition process, first, it is determined whether a specific error has occurred. As a specific error, here, the state of the input port related to the state signal is checked, and if the ball clogging signal, the supply end signal, the counting error signal, the door opening signal, etc. are generated, the least significant bit b0 is set to 1 Set to (H). And a normal symbol hit flag (b1), a normal symbol probability variation flag (b2), a normal symbol time saving state flag (b3), a normal electric auditors product operating flag (b4), a universal electric auditors open extension state flag (b5) , Ordinary symbol variation flag (b6), and test signal special symbol 2 small hit flag (b7) is acquired, and the flag value is in the OFF state (00H), the corresponding bit is 0 (L), the ON state For (5AH), 1(H) is set in the corresponding bit (the same applies to second information to fifth information described later). For example, a specific error has not occurred, probability change state (normal symbol probability fluctuation flag ON, normal symbol time saving state flag ON, ordinary electric utility object open extension state flag ON), during ordinary electric open game (normal symbol hit flag ON, ordinary electric Characters operating flag ON, normal symbol fluctuation flag OFF (normal symbol is stopped by auxiliary hit symbol)), and special figure 2 is a small hit winning state (special symbol for test signal 2 small hit flag ON) Then, the bit pattern of the first information is “10111110”. Then, the information regarding the ON/OFF state of the various flags related to the first information is output to the test-shooting tester information terminal port 1 (step S602). The transmission form to the test apparatus may be a serial form or a parallel form (the same applies to steps S603 to S610 described later). As a result, various kinds of information belonging to the first information are output as the type test signal. Therefore, in this processing, the type test signal type output to the test device corresponding to each bit is the "gaming machine error status signal (b0)-special symbol 2 small" listed in the column of the test firing test device information terminal port 1 shown in the figure. The hit signal (b7)".

Then, a second information acquisition process for acquiring the second information is performed (step S603). This second information is the condition device operation flag (b0), the accessory continuous operation device operation flag (b1), the test signal special symbol 1 big hit flag (b2), the special symbol probability variation flag (b3), the special symbol time saving The state flag (b4), the special symbol 1 changing flag (b5), and the special electric auditors product 1 operation flag (b6), and the highest bit b7 is unused. The "special electric auditors product 1 operation flag" is a flag used for determining whether or not the upper special variation winning device 42 (the upper winning opening 40 for big hit) is operating, and the flag is When the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), it indicates that the special variation winning device 42 is in operation. When the flag is in the OFF state (=00H), the special variation winning device 42 is inactive. Indicates that it is inside. During the round game, during the period when the flag is in the ON state (=5 AH), that is, when the upper special variation winning device 42 is in operation, the special winning opening 40 is opened and then the special winning opening 40 is opened. It is a period until the remaining ball discharge time (the allowance time for the game balls to be discharged from the special winning opening: 1980 ms) elapses after being closed, and in the other states, it is in the OFF state (=00H). .. Further, a "special electric auditors product 2 operation flag" is provided separately from the "special electric auditors product 1 operation flag", and this "special electric auditors product 2 operation flag" means the lower special variation winning device 52 (small. This is a flag used for determining whether or not the winning big winning opening 40 for hitting is in operation. When the flag is in the ON state (=5AH), the lower special variation winning device 52 is in operation. When the flag is OFF (=00H), it means that the lower special variation winning device 52 is not in operation.

Then, the ON/OFF states of the various flags related to the second information are output to the test-firing test device information terminal port 2 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S604). As a result, various types of information belonging to the second information are output as the type test signal. The type test signal type in this processing is “condition device operating signal (b0) to special electric auditors 1 operating signal (b6) (most significant bit (b7)” listed in the column of the test firing test device information terminal port 2 shown in the figure. Is unused)”.

Next, a third information acquisition process for acquiring the third information is performed (step S605). This third information, the normal symbol number (b0 to b2), special symbol 2 big hit flag for test signals (b3), special symbol probability variation flag (b4), special symbol time saving state flag (b5), and special symbol 2 variation They are a medium flag (b6) and a special electric auditors product 2 operation flag (b7). The normal symbol number (ordinary stop symbol number) is data that specifies a normal stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a. Here, the lower 3 bits are used to specify the normal stop symbol number.

Then, the normal stop symbol number and the ON/OFF state of various flags relating to the third information are output to the test-firing test device information terminal port 3 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S606). As a result, various kinds of information belonging to the third information are output as the type test signal. The type test signal type in this processing is “ordinary stop symbol number (b0 to b2) to special electric auditors 2 operating signal (b7)” listed in the column of the test-firing test device information terminal port 3 shown in the figure. In addition, the special symbol fluctuating flag (special symbol 1 fluctuating flag or special symbol 2 fluctuating flag) is, of course, in the ON state during the variable display, and is also maintained in the ON state during the change time measurement interruption. (See FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, during the period during which the special figure 1 is suspended for measurement, the output state of the special symbol 1 varying signal is maintained, and during the period during which the special diagram 2 is suspended for measurement, the output state of the special symbol 2 varying signal is maintained. However, in the case of the present embodiment, the small hit is won only on the special figure 2 side, so that the measurement is interrupted only on the special figure 1 side. Further, in the case of forced loss stop, because the stop symbol is forcibly displayed as a stop symbol, the special symbol changing flag is turned off, and the output of the special symbol 2 changing signal is stopped.

Then, a fourth information acquisition process for acquiring the fourth information is performed (step S607). This fourth information is a special stop symbol number (special symbol 1 stop symbol number) of special figure 1 (b0 to b7). Here, the special stop symbol number of special figure 2 is specified using 1 byte or less.

Then, the information capable of specifying the special symbol 1 stop symbol number related to the fourth information is output to the test-fire test device information terminal port 4 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S608). As a result, various kinds of information belonging to the fourth information are output as the type test signal. The type test signal type in this process is "special symbol 1 data (special symbol 1 stop symbol number identifiable signal) (b0 to b7)" listed in the column of the test firing test device information terminal port 4 shown in the figure.

Then, a fifth information acquisition process for acquiring the fifth information is performed (step S609). This fifth information is a special stop symbol number of special figure 2 (special symbol 2 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7). Here, the special stop symbol number of special figure 2 is specified using 1 byte or less.

Then, the information capable of specifying the special symbol 1 stop symbol number related to the fifth information is output to the test-firing test device information terminal port 5 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S610). As a result, various information belonging to the fifth information is output as the type test signal. The type test signal type in this processing is "special symbol 2 data (special symbol 2 stop symbol number identifiable signal) (b0 to b7)" listed in the column of the test-firing test device information terminal port 5 shown. When the process of step S610 is completed, the test firing test signal terminal management process is exited.

It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately determine how to combine the various types of information of the first information to the fifth information and which test emission tester information terminal port outputs to the type test device. Further, the test information is not limited to the first information to the fifth information, and can be appropriately determined as needed.

<30A. Out-of-area RAM check processing: FIG. 30A>
Next, the out-of-area RAM check processing (step S824) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30A(A) is a flowchart showing details of the out-of-area RAM check processing according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 30(B) is a flowchart showing a modified example of the out-of-area RAM check processing. This out-of-area RAM check process is a process (common process) executed not only during the performance display monitor process of FIG. 28 but also during the performance display monitor total division process (step S040) of FIG. 8A.

In the out-of-area RAM check processing, it is checked whether or not the processing related to performance display is correctly executed (step S841), and whether or not the data in the RAM area related to performance display is damaged (step S842). ), if there is an abnormality, a data initialization process for clearing the measurement data is executed (step S843).

In FIG. 30, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the check data is the normal value (AA55H) of the initial value (step S831). The check data is data monitored in the process (out-ball number confirmation process: not shown) for comparing and judging the total number of out-of-states R and the normal out-number of S S. Also, when the normal out number S is large (R<S), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and “00H” is set as a value indicating the abnormality in the check data. If the check data is not the normal value (AA55H) (step S831: NO), the process proceeds to step S843 to execute a data initialization process described later.

If the check data is a normal value (step S841: YES), then it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the count data (step S842). The case where the count data has an abnormality is, for example, a case where the switch input data indicates an abnormal value, or a case where the arithmetic processing required to calculate the performance information is not correctly executed. The case where the arithmetic processing is not correctly executed typically includes the case where the arithmetic processing (sphere count processing) for the sensor related to the calculation of the performance information is not correctly executed. The sensors to be counted according to the present embodiment include a middle starting opening sensor 33a, a right starting opening sensor 34a, a lower right starting opening sensor 35a, a general winning opening sensor 43a, a lower winning opening sensor 52a (an upper winning opening sensor 42a). Are excluded because they are the detection sensors related to the jackpot 40 for big hits), and 6 types of sensors such as the OUT monitoring switch 49a. Therefore, whether the "ball number counting process" for all of these sensors, specifically, the award ball number addition process (not shown) and the out ball number addition process (not shown) have been correctly executed. It is determined whether or not.

The sphere count processing is executed in the performance display monitor total division processing (step S040) during the main processing shown in FIG. 8, as already described. In this ball count processing, first, the five sensors of the middle starting mouth sensor 33a, the right starting mouth sensor 34a, the lower right starting mouth sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the lower maximum winning opening sensor 52a are targeted. "Sensor detection counter" that counts the number of processes each time the process is completed, and if the winning is confirmed, the number of prize balls is added to add the number of prize balls. Is incremented by 1 (sensor detection counter +1). Specifically, when the prize ball number addition process related to the middle starting opening sensor 33a is finished, 1 is added to the sensor detection number counter, the value is updated to "01H", and then the right starting opening sensor 34a is related. When the prize ball number addition process is completed, the value of the sensor detection number counter is incremented by 1 and updated to "02H",..., When the prize ball number addition process related to the last lower special winning opening sensor 52a is completed, the sensor detection is performed. The frequency counter is updated to "05H". Finally, the out ball number addition process for the OUT monitoring switch 49a is performed, and when the out ball number addition process is completed, the sensor detection number counter is cleared to 00H. Therefore, when the above-mentioned ball number counting process (prize ball number addition process, out ball number addition process) is completed, the range of values that the sensor detection number counter can take is "00H" to "05H", and the ball number count process is performed. When the (final out-ball number addition processing) is correctly completed, "00H" should be set in the sensor detection number counter. However, if this value becomes a value other than "00H" to "05H" due to some trouble, or if it is other than "00H" when starting the prize ball number addition processing for the middle starting mouth sensor 33a, etc. Assuming that the count data is not valid (abnormal) (step S842:=out of range), data initialization processing is executed (step S843). On the other hand, when the count data is valid (step S832: within the range), it is determined that the count data is normal, and the data initialization process of step S843 is skipped, and the out-of-region RAM check process is exited.

In the data initialization process of step S843, the initial value (normal value) “AA55H” is set in the check data, and the RAM area (performance display storage area, measurement information storage area, etc.) related to performance display is cleared, Clear the display data being displayed. However, only the measurement information storage area in the RAM area for performance display may be cleared. The reason is that the data stored in the performance display storage area usually stores the previous base value data (when this time is the first measurement, the specific value for the test section is stored (data This is because it is considered that the result of the previous correct processing is saved for this data.Also, the operation confirmation timer may be cleared. Even if the data initialization process is executed, a new base value is calculated only by displaying an error on the performance indicator 99, without executing special error processing such as stopping the game or measuring a new base value. Subsequent processing (steps S824 to S829 in FIG. 28) is performed.

In addition, when the data initialization process of step S843 is executed, an error notification (base value count error notification) may be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes). In this case, the performance indicator 99 can be displayed in an error-only display mode. Further, even when an error is being displayed, a new base value is measured (the normal-time payout number, the normal-time out number, the total state out-number, and the base value are calculated). The error display period may be a predetermined time, or a predetermined game period, for example, a normal payout number, a normal time out number, or a total state out number is a predetermined number (error cancellation number: 100, for example). Or a period until a new normal state arrives (a period until a new measurement target section arrives). Of course, a new measurement may not be started during the error display period, and a new measurement may be started after the error display is completed. As with the area RAM error (backup flag error, set value data error, etc.), The power may be turned on again as an error elimination condition.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the RAM area related to the performance display is checked in the performance display monitor tabulation division processing (step S040 in FIG. 8B) and the performance display monitor processing (step S101 in FIG. 13), and if there is a defect. First, after initializing an out-of-area RAM area (measurement information storage area) in which measurement data necessary for calculating performance information is stored, measurement is started from the initial state. Further, the RAM area outside the area related to the performance display is not the RAM check target when the power is turned on, that is, the target of the RAM initialization process of step S021 of FIG. 8A and step S028 of FIG. 8B. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the contents of the RAM in the area, the data related to the performance display is not initialized (cleared) together, and only the data related to the normal game progress is independently initialized. .. Therefore, as long as the stored contents of the RAM area for performance display are not defective, as long as the backup function operates normally and the gaming machine operates normally, it is permanent even for days or years. The data can be stored in the memory, and performance information can be stored and performance information can be displayed for a long time.

(Modified Example of Out-of-Region RAM Check Processing: FIG. 30A(B))
The outside RAM check process of FIG. 30A(A) can be configured as follows.

FIG. 30A(B) shows the configuration of the out-of-area RAM check process of FIG. 30A(A), the data initialization process of step S843, the process of clearing the operation confirmation timer to zero, and the operation confirmation timer of step S844 set to 5000 ms. The processing to be performed is added. The other processing contents are the same as those in FIG. 30A(A).

In the configuration of FIG. 30A(B), as shown in the figure, if the determination result of step S841 is NO and the determination result of step S842 is determined to be out of the range due to a defect in data or the like, a check is performed as the data initialization process of step S843. The data and the RAM area related to the performance display (the performance display storage area, the measurement information storage area, etc.) are cleared, the display data currently displayed are cleared, and the operation confirmation timer is cleared. Then, the operation confirmation timer is reset to 5000 ms (step S844). Therefore, in the case of this modification, if an abnormality occurs in the contents of the out-of-area RAM, the operation confirmation display is executed again for 5 seconds after the initialization of the RAM. This is different from the configuration of FIG. 30A(A) in which the operation confirmation display is executed only when the power is restored. If the operation confirmation timer is not set again in this modification, the display will be forcibly terminated when the operation confirmation display is being performed when the data initialization process is executed. After that, the performance display 99 displays the real-time base value and the history base value.

<30B. Out-of-area RAM check process: FIG. 30B>
Next, the operation confirmation process (step S833) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30B is a flowchart showing details of the operation confirmation process.

In FIG. 30B, the CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the operation confirmation timer and adds 1 to the lighting timer (steps S851 and S852).

Next, it is determined whether or not the blink switching timing has come (step S853). In the present embodiment, during the operation confirmation display, the turn-off period and the turn-on period are repeated at a predetermined cycle of, for example, 300 ms. The blinking switching timing is managed by the lighting timer. In this embodiment, the lighting timer is incremented by 1 every 4 ms interrupt. If the switching timing is 300 ms, it can be determined that the blinking switching timing has come, depending on whether or not the value of the lighting timer is "75". If the blinking switching timing has not come (step S853: NO), nothing is done, that is, the operation confirmation process is exited while maintaining the current lighting or extinguishing state.

On the other hand, if the blink switching timing has come (step S853: YES), the lighting timer is cleared (step 854) and the update cycle counter is updated (step S856). The update cycle counter is used as a counter for determining whether it is on or blinking. For example, if the update cycle counter is an 8-bit counter that circulates in the range of 0 to 255 by increment processing (corresponding to step S856), if the least significant bit of the value of the update cycle counter is "0", lighting control is performed. However, if it is "1", blinking control such as turning off control can be performed.

Next, with reference to the update cycle counter, it is determined whether the value is "0" or "1" (step S856). In the case of the present embodiment, when the operation confirmation display is started, the update cycle counter is controlled to zero and the performance indicator 99 is controlled to be fully lit. Therefore, when this process is passed for the first time, the value of the update cycle counter is updated to "1" in the process of step S856, and therefore the process proceeds to step S857 (step S856:=1), and the identification display is performed. Light-out data, that is, "0000H" is set in the copy output buffer and the base display output buffer, respectively (steps S857 and S858). These extinguished data are directly written to each output buffer without referring to a data table or the like. As a result, the lighting period ends and the extinguishing period occurs.

On the other hand, when the next blink switching timing has come (step S853: YES) and the update cycle counter is “0” (step S856:=0), the process proceeds to step S859, and the output buffer for the identification display unit is used. Lighting data, that is, "FFFFH" is set in the output buffer for the base display unit (steps S859 and S860). These lighting data are also directly written in each output buffer without referring to the data table or the like. As a result, the lighting period ends and the extinguishing period occurs. As a result, the turn-off period ends and the turn-on period occurs. In the present embodiment, when the operation confirmation display is performed, for example, a predetermined data value is simply set in each output buffer without referring to the LED data table as shown in FIG. Therefore, the operation confirmation display (all blinks) can be realized by simple processing.

By the above operation confirmation processing, all blinking (performance confirmation display) of the performance indicator 99 which is repeatedly turned on and off is performed for a predetermined time (5000 ms), and the operation of the performance indicator 99 can be visually checked. .. If the performance indicator 99 does not display a normal operation confirmation display, for example, if a part of the 7-segment indicator is kept off due to a disconnection or the like, appropriate measures such as component replacement may be taken.

During the operation confirmation process, the performance display monitor total division process (S040 in FIG. 8B) is executed, and at least the count process necessary for calculating the base value is executed. As a result, it is possible to accurately reflect the winning ball or the out ball during the operation confirmation in the base value displayed after the operation confirmation display. However, since the base value is not displayed during the operation confirmation display, the base value may or may not be calculated during 5000 ms during the operation confirmation display. Further, during the operation confirmation process, a determination process for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the performance indicator 99 is provided, and when an abnormality occurs, a dedicated error command (operation confirmation display error command) is issued. A process of transmitting to 24 may be provided. When the performance control unit 24 receives the operation confirmation display error command, the performance means can be used to notify that the performance display 99 has an abnormality. For example, along with the alarm sound, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an effect image such as "the performance indicator 99 is abnormal". Thereby, for example, there is no fear of overlooking a defect such as the decimal point DP that is difficult to visually confirm.

<30C. Display data update process: FIG. 30C>
Next, the display data update process (step S831) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30C is a flowchart showing details of the display data update process.

In FIG. 30, the CPU 201 first determines whether the display period of the base value is a test period, a first measurement period (N=1), a subsequent measurement period (N≧2), or a real time base. The identification display section display pattern data is acquired from the identification display section LED data table according to any of the plurality of display sections such as the value display section or the history-based value display section (step S871), and the identification is performed. It is set in the output buffer for the display unit (step S872). In the present embodiment, two types of base value output periods, that is, a first base value output period for displaying a real-time base value and a second base value output period for displaying a history base value are provided, and they are switched every 5000 ms. Has become. Further, in the identification display unit LED data table, as shown in FIG. 38(a), display pattern data (upper level "01111100B" ('b' display) corresponding to the identification display of "bL." showing the real-time base value is displayed. Display pattern data (upper level "01111100B" ('b') for lower segment "10111000B" (for 7 segment with'L' display) and display of the identification base of "b6." “For 7-segment display” and lower order “11111101B” (for 7-segment display “6.”) are stored.

Also, according to the base value at that time (base value during real-time measurement), the display pattern data for the base display unit is acquired from the decimal value LED data table (step S873) and set in the output buffer for the base display unit. (Step S874). In the decimal value LED data table, as shown in FIG. 38B, display pattern data of 1-byte length corresponding to 10 kinds of numerical values 0 to 9 are stored. For example, in the first base value output period for displaying the real-time base value, and if the first base value at that time is “35”, “3” is displayed as the tens digit display data from the decimal value LED data table. "01001111B" corresponding to "" and "01101101B" corresponding to "5" are acquired as the display data of the first place, and are set in the output buffer for the base display unit.

Through the above display update processing, the real-time base value and the previous history base value are periodically switched and displayed (for example, every 5000 ms) on the performance indicator 99 after all blinking (operation confirmation) is completed. The display can be realized.

(Specific example of display mode of performance indicator 99 after power-on: FIG. 38)
FIG. 38 shows performance during various periods when RAM is initialized (RAM is cleared), settings are changed, RAM is abnormal (setting value data is abnormal, backup flag is abnormal), settings are confirmed, and backup is restored. The display mode of the indicator 99 is shown. However, FIG. 38 illustrates a display mode in the case where one of the four 7-segment displays of the performance display 99 is made to function as the setting display 97.

In the present embodiment, the RAM initialization process in the area (step S028 in FIG. 8B), the setting change process (step S022 in FIG. 8B, FIG. 11), the setting confirmation process (step S026 in FIG. 8B, except when the RAM is abnormal) 12) or after the backup restoration process (step S027 in FIG. 8B) is finished, the main control unit side timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is activated to start the operation confirmation period, and the performance indicator 99 indicates that 5 seconds have passed. After all blinking (confirmation display) is performed, the base value is displayed (steps S032 to S035 in FIG. 8B, step S833 in FIG. 28). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38, during a RAM clear notification effect such as “RAM clearing” during RAM clear, during setting change such as “Setting change in progress” during setting change, during production (during setting change operation period) ), and when the RAM is abnormal, during the power-on instruction production (during the power-on waiting period) such as “RAM error, please turn on the power again and change the setting value”, it is before the start of the operation confirmation period. Therefore, the display of the performance indicator 99 is turned off or is not displayed. However, during the performance during setting confirmation (during the setting confirmation period) and during the performance during setting change (during the setting change operation period), one of the four 7-segment LEDs of the performance display 99 functions as the setting display 97. Therefore, the setting value information is displayed (see the column of "Setting value display" in the figure). In the case of RAM abnormality, it is placed in a power-on waiting state (step S019 in FIG. 8A, FIG. 10(B)), and the game operation is stopped until the power is turned on again. Remains unlit (not displayed) (see the power-on display column shown).

It should be noted that in any of the cases of clearing the RAM, changing the setting, confirming the setting, and restoring the backup, 5 seconds related to the operation confirmation display during the customer waiting standby performance after each processing (displaying the customer waiting demo screen) When all blinking of are finished, then the base value display is started. When changing the setting, all blinking for 5 seconds starts upon completion of the setting change operation, so if the setting change completion effect such as "setting changed" continues for 5 seconds or more, change the setting. All blinking for 5 seconds ends during the completion effect, and the display of the base value starts. Therefore, in this case, an overlapping display period of the setting change completion effect and the base value display occurs. Other effects, for example, a recovery completion effect that displays "Resumed from power failure, please restart the game" at the time of backup recovery (not shown) similarly, if it continues for 5 seconds or more, that recovery All blinking for 5 seconds ends during the completion effect, and the display of the base value starts.

It should be noted that the RAM error notification related to the RAM clear is executed with the highest priority over other notification effects, and even if the effect control command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 during the execution of the RAM error notification, the RAM error notification is performed. As long as is not completed (after 30 seconds of the RAM clear notification timer), other effects are not executed. If the RAM clear notification timer (see step S030 in FIG. 8B) has not elapsed and the process does not proceed any further, all lights are off (not displayed) during the RAM error notification. However, if the RAM clear notification timer is configured to simply count the RAM error notification time and proceed with the subsequent processing, all the flashes for 5 seconds after the start of the RAM error notification, and then the display of the base value is started. become.

In each of the embodiments described above, a pachinko gaming machine that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium has been described, but the gaming machine is not particularly limited as long as the gaming machine can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a game machine that uses a game medal as a game medium, a game machine that uses a game medium that uses electromagnetic recording (a game machine such as a so-called "enclosed type game machine (management type game machine)"), or a spinning drum. It may be a game machine or the like. Further, as long as the object of the present invention is achieved and the effect is achieved, it is not limited to the simultaneous change type, and naturally, when one of the special symbols is being variably displayed, the other special symbol is not changed. Can be applied.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 gaming machine,
2 front frame,
3 game board,
3a game area,
4 outer frame,
6 glass doors,
9 Upper saucer,
15 firing control handle,
19 game ball payout device,
20 main controller (main control board),
24 Production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 firing control board,
29 payout control board,
32 launchers,
34, 34a Upper starting port, upper starting port sensor 35, 35a Lower starting port, lower starting port sensor,
36 liquid crystal display device,
37, 37a Normal symbol starting port, normal symbol starting port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
50, 52a special winning opening, big winning opening sensor 41 ordinary variable winning device,
41c Normal electric accessory solenoid,
52 Special variation winning device,
52c Winning prize solenoid,
43 General prize holes,
43a General winning a prize sensor,
45 decorative lamps,
46 speakers,
47 movable wings,
49 Out mouth,
60 full detection sensor,
61 Front door open sensor,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 Setting change complete switch,
97 Setting display,
98 RAM clear switch,
99 performance indicator,
201 Main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 Production control CPU,
242 Production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM.

Claims (1)

A lottery means for executing a lottery on winning based on the establishment of the start condition,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, a win game control means for controlling a win game,
Display controllably constructed in accordance with the predetermined display pattern data, and the information display means capable of displaying Teijo paper where it is calculated based on the game results,
An information display control means for controlling the information display means,
A data table that stores a plurality of types of display pattern data that can be displayed on the information display means ,
It is possible to execute a backup process that retains the game information immediately before that when the power is cut off.
A game machine capable of starting a game based on the game information held by the backup process when the power is turned on ,
The information display control means,
After the power is turned on, a confirmation display process for displaying a confirmation display on the information display unit for a predetermined time and a predetermined information display process for displaying the predetermined information on the information display unit after the confirmation display is executed for a predetermined time Is possible,
If the power is cut off during the confirmation display, the confirmation display is configured to be executed again for the predetermined time when the power is turned on next time.
In the predetermined information display processing, display control of the information display means is performed using display pattern data corresponding to the predetermined information, and in the confirmation display processing, the information display means is displayed using display pattern data corresponding to the confirmation display. Control and
Of the predetermined information display process and the confirmation display process, only in the case of the predetermined information display process, the display pattern data is acquired from the data table ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.